EXIT

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

GI

SECTION EC MA

EM

LC

CONTENTS
FE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................9 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................9 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................69 AT
PRECAUTIONS .............................................................15 Introduction ................................................................69
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................69
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............15 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................70 AX
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................84
System of Engine and A/T.........................................15 OBD System Operation Chart ...................................85
SU
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................16 CONSULT-II ...............................................................91
Precautions ................................................................17 Generic Scan Tool (GST) ........................................105
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................18 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION................107 BR
PREPARATION .............................................................19 Introduction ..............................................................107
Special Service Tools ................................................19 Work Flow................................................................109
Commercial Service Tools .........................................19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ......... 111 ST
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL Basic Inspection....................................................... 111
SYSTEM.........................................................................21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............21 DESCRIPTION .............................................................126
RS
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................25 DTC Inspection Priority Chart..................................126
System Diagram ........................................................26 Fail-safe Chart .........................................................127 BT
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................27 Symptom Diagnosis Procedure ...............................128
System Chart .............................................................28 Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................135
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor HA
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................29 Mode ........................................................................139
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................29 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................31 Mode ........................................................................142 SC
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................32 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................145
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..153 EL
speed) ........................................................................33 Description ...............................................................153
Evaporative Emission System ...................................33 Testing Condition .....................................................153
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ..................................49 Inspection Procedure...............................................153 IDX
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................51 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................154
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................51 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................51 INCIDENT.....................................................................157
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ................................52 Description ...............................................................157
Injector .......................................................................53 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..........54 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........158
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................158
Adjustment .................................................................56 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)......165
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................67 Component Description ...........................................165
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................165 Mode ........................................................................206
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................165 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................206
Possible Cause........................................................166 Possible Cause........................................................206
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................207
Overall Function Check ...........................................168 Overall Function Check ...........................................207
Wiring Diagram ........................................................169 Wiring Diagram ........................................................209
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................170 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................211
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ........173 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2)
Component Description ...........................................173 FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT MONITORING).............216
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................173 Component Description ...........................................216
Possible Cause........................................................173 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................173 Mode ........................................................................216
Wiring Diagram ........................................................175 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................216
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................176 Possible Cause........................................................216
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................217
SENSOR ......................................................................179 Overall Function Check ...........................................218
Component Description ...........................................179 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................218
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................179 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2)
Possible Cause........................................................179 FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT MONITORING)..............224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................179 Component Description ...........................................224
Wiring Diagram ........................................................181 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................182 Mode ........................................................................224
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................224
SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT) .......................................184 Possible Cause........................................................224
Component Description ...........................................184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................225
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................184 Overall Function Check ...........................................226
Possible Cause........................................................184 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................226
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................185 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2)
Wiring Diagram ........................................................186 FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE MONITORING) ..............232
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................187 Component Description ...........................................232
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........189 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ...............................................................189 Mode ........................................................................232
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................232
Mode ........................................................................189 Possible Cause........................................................232
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................190 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................233
Possible Cause........................................................190 Overall Function Check ...........................................234
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................190 Wiring Diagram ........................................................235
Wiring Diagram ........................................................194 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................237
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................195 DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2)
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE) ...............................245
SENSOR (ECTS) .........................................................201 Component Description ...........................................245
Description ...............................................................201 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................201 Mode ........................................................................245
Possible Cause........................................................201 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................245
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................202 Possible Cause........................................................245
Wiring Diagram ........................................................203 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................246
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204 Wiring Diagram ........................................................247
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................249
FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT) ............................................206 DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2)
Component Description ...........................................206 FRONT HO2S HEATER ..............................................253
Description ...............................................................253

EC-2
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2)
Mode ........................................................................253 REAR HO2S HEATER ................................................298
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................253 Description ...............................................................298 GI
Possible Cause........................................................253 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................254 Mode ........................................................................298 MA
Wiring Diagram ........................................................255 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................298
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................257 Possible Cause........................................................298
DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................299 EM
REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE MONITORING) ..........260 Wiring Diagram ........................................................300
Component Description ...........................................260 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................302
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) LC
Mode ........................................................................260 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (LEAN).......305
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................260 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................305
Possible Cause........................................................260 Possible Cause........................................................305
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................261 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................305
Overall Function Check ...........................................261 Wiring Diagram ........................................................307 FE
Wiring Diagram ........................................................263 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................309
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................265 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2)
DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION (RICH)........313 AT
REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE MONITORING).........270 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................313
Component Description ...........................................270 Possible Cause........................................................313
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................313
AX
Mode ........................................................................270 Wiring Diagram ........................................................315
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................270 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................317 SU
Possible Cause........................................................270 DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................271 SENSOR ......................................................................320
Overall Function Check ...........................................271 Component Description ...........................................320 BR
Wiring Diagram ........................................................273 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................320
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................275 Possible Cause........................................................320
DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................320 ST
REAR HO2S (RESPONSE MONITORING) ................280 Wiring Diagram ........................................................322
Component Description ...........................................280 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................323
RS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE
Mode ........................................................................280 ENRICHMENT PROTECTION.....................................325
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................280 System Description..................................................325 BT
Possible Cause........................................................280 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................281 Mode ........................................................................325
Overall Function Check ...........................................281 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................326 HA
Wiring Diagram ........................................................283 Possible Cause........................................................326
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................285 Overall Function Check ...........................................326
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) Wiring Diagram ........................................................329
SC
REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE) .................................290 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................331
Component Description ...........................................290 Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................342 EL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER
Mode ........................................................................290 MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE ...............343
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................290 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................343 IDX
Possible Cause........................................................290 Possible Cause........................................................343
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................290 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................344
Overall Function Check ...........................................291 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................344
Wiring Diagram ........................................................292 DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ...........................351
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................294 Component Description ...........................................351
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................351

EC-3
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Possible Cause........................................................351 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................392
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................351 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................393
Wiring Diagram ........................................................352 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................353 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE (CIRCUIT).................406
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Description ...............................................................406
(CKPS) (POS) ..............................................................356 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ...........................................356 Mode ........................................................................406
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................407
Mode ........................................................................356 Possible Cause........................................................407
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................356 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................407
Possible Cause........................................................356 Wiring Diagram ........................................................408
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................357 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................409
Wiring Diagram ........................................................358 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................359 CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT) ......412
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Component Description ...........................................412
(CMPS) (PHASE).........................................................364 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ...........................................364 Mode ........................................................................412
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................364 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................412
Possible Cause........................................................364 Possible Cause........................................................412
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................364 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................413
Wiring Diagram ........................................................366 Wiring Diagram ........................................................414
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................367 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................415
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)......................370 DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
Description ...............................................................370 CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..............419
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Description ...........................................419
Mode ........................................................................371 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................371 Mode ........................................................................419
Possible Cause........................................................371 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................419
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................372 Possible Cause........................................................419
Wiring Diagram ........................................................374 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................420
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................375 Wiring Diagram ........................................................421
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................422
(CIRCUIT).....................................................................379 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS
Description ...............................................................379 LEAK)...........................................................................431
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................431
Mode ........................................................................380 Possible Cause........................................................431
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................380 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................432
Possible Cause........................................................380 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................433
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................380 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram ........................................................382 (SLOSH).......................................................................444
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................383 Component Description ...........................................444
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................444
BANK, -B2) THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION...386 Possible Cause........................................................444
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................386 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................444
Possible Cause........................................................386 Wiring Diagram ........................................................445
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................387 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................446
Overall Function Check ...........................................387 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION .......448
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................388 Component Description ...........................................448
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................448
LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)................................391 Possible Cause........................................................448
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................391 Overall Function Check ...........................................448
Possible Cause........................................................391 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT ...........450

EC-4
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Component Description ...........................................450 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................482
On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................450 DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Possible Cause........................................................450 SOLENOID VALVE......................................................483 GI
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................450 Description ...............................................................483
Wiring Diagram ........................................................451 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor MA
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................452 Mode ........................................................................484
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) .........454 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................484
Component Description ...........................................454 Possible Cause........................................................484 EM
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................454 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................485
Possible Cause........................................................454 Wiring Diagram ........................................................487
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................454 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................488 LC
Overall Function Check ...........................................455 DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT
Wiring Diagram ........................................................456 BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...................507
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................457 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................507
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) - Possible Cause........................................................507
AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ...............458 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................507 FE
Description ...............................................................458 Overall Function Check ...........................................508
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................508
Mode ........................................................................459 DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................459 VACUUM CHECK SWITCH.........................................509
Possible Cause........................................................459 Component Description ...........................................509
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................459 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
AX
Wiring Diagram ........................................................461 Mode ........................................................................509
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................462 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................509 SU
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION Possible Cause........................................................509
SWITCH .......................................................................467 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................510
Component Description ...........................................467 Wiring Diagram ........................................................511 BR
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................512
Mode ........................................................................467 DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT .....................515
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................467 Description ...............................................................515 ST
Possible Cause........................................................467 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................515
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................468 Possible Cause........................................................515
RS
Overall Function Check ...........................................468 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................515
Wiring Diagram ........................................................470 Overall Function Check ...........................................516
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................471 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................516 BT
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE..................476 DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE........517
System Description..................................................476 Description ...............................................................517
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................476 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................517 HA
Possible Cause........................................................476 Possible Cause........................................................517
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................476 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................517
Wiring Diagram ........................................................477 Wiring Diagram ........................................................518
SC
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................478 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................519
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................479 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE EL
Component Description ...........................................479 (OVERHEAT) ...............................................................520
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................479 System Description..................................................520
Possible Cause........................................................479 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor IDX
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................479 Mode ........................................................................520
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................480 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................521
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.....................481 Possible Cause........................................................521
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................481 Overall Function Check ...........................................521
Possible Cause........................................................481 Wiring Diagram ........................................................523
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................481 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................525

EC-5
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................536 Wiring Diagram ........................................................580
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................581
(FPCM) .........................................................................537 DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL
Description ...............................................................537 LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE) .................................586
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................586
Mode ........................................................................537 Possible Cause........................................................586
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................538 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................587
Possible Cause........................................................538 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................587
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................538 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
Wiring Diagram ........................................................539 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................................588
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................540 Description ...............................................................588
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL...................................544 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Description ...........................................544 Mode ........................................................................588
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................544 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................589
Possible Cause........................................................544 Possible Cause........................................................589
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................544 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................589
Wiring Diagram ........................................................546 Wiring Diagram ........................................................591
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................549 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................592
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
(CKPS) (REF) ..............................................................555 CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (CLOSE).........600
Component Description ...........................................555 Component Description ...........................................600
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................555 Mode ........................................................................600
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................555 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................600
Possible Cause........................................................556 Possible Cause........................................................600
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................556 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................601
Wiring Diagram ........................................................557 Wiring Diagram ........................................................602
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................558 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................603
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
(CKPS) (POS) (COG) ..................................................561 CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE FLOW
Component Description ...........................................561 MONITORING ..............................................................608
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor System Description..................................................608
Mode ........................................................................561 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................608
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................561 Possible Cause........................................................608
Possible Cause........................................................561 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................609
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................562 Overall Function Check ...........................................609
Wiring Diagram ........................................................563 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................611
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................564 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR.............569 CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE (OPEN)...........620
Component Description ...........................................569 Component Description ...........................................620
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................569 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Possible Cause........................................................569 Mode ........................................................................620
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................570 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................620
Wiring Diagram ........................................................572 Possible Cause........................................................620
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................573 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................621
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN) ........................577 Overall Function Check ...........................................622
Description ...............................................................577 Wiring Diagram ........................................................623
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................624
Mode ........................................................................578 DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................578 (GROUND SIGNAL) ....................................................629
Possible Cause........................................................578 Component Description ...........................................629
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................579 On Board Diagnostic Logic......................................629

EC-6
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Possible Cause........................................................629 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................629 Mode ........................................................................664
Wiring Diagram ........................................................630 Wiring Diagram ........................................................665 GI
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................631 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................666
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS START SIGNAL...........................................................670 MA
VALVE (CIRCUIT)........................................................632 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ...............................................................632 Mode ........................................................................670
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ........................................................671 EM
Mode ........................................................................632 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................672
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................632 FUEL PUMP.................................................................674
Possible Cause........................................................633 System Description..................................................674 LC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................633 Component Description ...........................................674
Wiring Diagram ........................................................634 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................635 Mode ........................................................................674
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS Wiring Diagram ........................................................675
VALVE..........................................................................638 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................676 FE
Description ...............................................................638 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT.......680
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor System Description..................................................680
Mode ........................................................................638 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................638 Mode ........................................................................680
Possible Cause........................................................639 Wiring Diagram ........................................................681
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................639 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................682
AX
Overall Function Check ...........................................640 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.........684
Wiring Diagram ........................................................641 Component Description ...........................................684 SU
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................642 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION Mode ........................................................................684
LINE .............................................................................650 Wiring Diagram ........................................................685 BR
Component Description ...........................................650 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................686
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................650 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................689
Possible Cause........................................................650 Description ...............................................................689 ST
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................650 Wiring Diagram ........................................................690
Wiring Diagram ........................................................651 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................691
RS
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................652 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................693
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) Wiring Diagram ........................................................693
SWITCH .......................................................................653 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................695 BT
Component Description ...........................................653 MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ............................699
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ........................................................699
Mode ........................................................................653 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......700 HA
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................653 Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................700
Possible Cause........................................................653 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................700
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................653 Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................700
SC
Overall Function Check ...........................................654 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................700
Wiring Diagram ........................................................655 EGR Temperature Sensor .......................................700 EL
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................656 Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater......................700
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM Fuel Pump ...............................................................700
(VIAS)...........................................................................658 IACV-AAC Valve ......................................................700 IDX
Description ...............................................................658 Injector .....................................................................701
Wiring Diagram ........................................................660 Resistor....................................................................701
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................661 Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................701
INJECTOR ...................................................................664 Calculated Load Value.............................................701
Component Description ...........................................664 Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................701
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater ......................701

EC-7
 EXIT

CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) ..........................701 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .......................701
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................701

EC-8
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NHEC0001

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC NHEC0001S01

Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1 Reference page GI
Unable to access ECM — EC-127

ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 EC-173

MA
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 EC-179
EM
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-126

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-132

LC
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-138

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-144

A/T COMM LINE P0600*2 EC-476

A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 EC-650

FE
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-158

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-109 AT

CAM PS/CIRC (PHS) P0340 EC-364

CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 EC-507 AX

CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 EC-507

CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 EC-467 SU

COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 P0115 EC-184

*COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0125 EC-201 BR

CPS/CIRC (POS) COG P1336 EC-561

CPS/CIRCUIT (POS) P0335 EC-356 ST

CPS/CIRCUIT (REF) P1335 EC-555

CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 EC-343

RS
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 EC-343
BT
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 EC-343

CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 EC-343

HA
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 EC-343

CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 EC-343

SC
ECM P0605 EC-479

EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-370

EL
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-577

EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 EC-569 IDX

EGR VOL CONT/V CIR P0403 EC-379

ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-121

ENG OVER TEMP P0217 EC-325

ENG OVER TEMP P1217*2 EC-520

EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 EC-431

EC-9
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)

Items
DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 EC-608

EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0450 EC-419

EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 EC-391

EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 EC-586

FPCM/CIRCUIT P1220 EC-537

FR O2 SE HEATER-B1 P0135 EC-253

FR O2 SE HEATER-B2 P0155 EC-253

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0130 EC-206

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0131 EC-216

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0132 EC-224

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0133 EC-232

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0134 EC-245

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0150 EC-206

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0151 EC-216

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0152 EC-224

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0153 EC-232

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0154 EC-245

FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0464 EC-450

FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P1464 EC-629

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 EC-448

FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) P0460 EC-444

FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 EC-305

FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 EC-305

FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 EC-313

FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 EC-313

FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 EC-320

IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 EC-458

IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 EC-544

KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325*2 EC-351

L/PRES SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-168

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 EC-165

MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 EC-343

NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615*2 EL-404

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE

P0000 —
REQUIRED.

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-193

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 EC-653

PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-103

EC-10
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)

Items
DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 EC-406

GI
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 EC-588

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0137 EC-260

MA
REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0138 EC-270

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0139 EC-280

EM
REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0140 EC-290

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0157 EC-260

LC
REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0158 EC-270

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0159 EC-280

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0160 EC-290

RR O2 SE HEATER-B1 P0141 EC-298 FE

RR O2 SE HEATER-B2 P0161 EC-298

SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 AT-174 AT

SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 P0755 AT-179

SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1130 EC-483 AX

SWL CON VC SW/CIRC P1165 EC-509

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-153 SU

TCS CIRC P1212*2 EC-517

TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211*2 EC-515

BR
THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 EC-481
ST
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 P1705 AT-184

TRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 P0120 EC-189

RS
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 EC-386

TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 EC-386

BT
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 EC-638

VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 EC-632

HA
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 P0500 EC-454

VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 P0720 AT-115 SC

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 EC-412

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 EC-600 EL

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 EC-620

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. IDX
*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.

EC-11
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NHEC0001S02

Items
DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

— Unable to access ECM EC-127

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE

P0000 —
REQUIRED.

P0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-165

P0105 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-173

P0110 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-179

P0115 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC*3 EC-184

P0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC*3 EC-189

P0125 *COOLANT T SEN/CIRC EC-201

P0130 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-206

P0131 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-216

P0132 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-224

P0133 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-232

P0134 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-245

P0135 FR O2 SE HEATER-B1 EC-253

P0137 REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-260

P0138 REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-270

P0139 REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-280

P0140 REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 EC-290

P0141 RR O2 SE HEATER-B1 EC-298

P0150 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-206

P0151 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-216

P0152 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-224

P0153 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-232

P0154 FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-245

P0155 FR O2 SE HEATER-B2 EC-253

P0157 REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-260

P0158 REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-270

P0159 REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-280

P0160 REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 EC-290

P0161 RR O2 SE HEATER-B2 EC-298

P0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 EC-305

P0172 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 EC-313

P0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 EC-305

P0175 FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 EC-313

P0180 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-320

P0217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-325

EC-12
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)

Items
DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

P0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-343

GI
P0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-343

P0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-343

MA
P0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-343

P0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-343

EM
P0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-343

P0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-343

LC
P0325*2 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-351

P0335 CPS/CIRCUIT (POS) EC-356

P0340 CAM PS/CIRC (PHS) EC-364

P0400 EGR SYSTEM EC-370 FE

P0403 EGR VOL CONT/V CIR EC-379

P0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-386 AT

P0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-386

P0440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-391 AX

P0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-406

P0446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-412 SU

P0450 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-419

P0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-431

BR
P0460 FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) EC-444
ST
P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-448

P0464 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-450

RS
P0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*4 EC-454

P0505 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-458

BT
P0510 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-467

P0600*2 A/T COMM LINE EC-476

HA
P0605 ECM EC-479

P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-103 SC

P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-109

P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR A/T*4 AT-115 EL

P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-121

P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-126 IDX

P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-132

P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-138

P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-144

P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-153

P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-158

EC-13
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)

Items
DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-168

P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-174

P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-179

P1126 THERMOSTAT FNCTN EC-481

P1130 SWIRL CONT SOL/V EC-483

P1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-507

P1165 SWL CON VC SW/CIRC EC-509

P1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-507

P1211*2 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-515

P1212*2 TCS CIRC EC-517

P1217*2 ENG OVER TEMP EC-520

P1220 FPCM/CIRCUIT EC-537

P1320 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-544

P1335 CPS/CIRCUIT (REF) EC-555

P1336 CPS/CIRC (POS) COG EC-561

P1401 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-569

P1402 EGR SYSTEM EC-577

P1440 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-586

P1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-588

P1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-600

P1447 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-608

P1448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-620

P1464 FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC EC-629

P1490 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-632

P1491 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V EC-638

P1605 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-650

P1610 - P1615*2 NATS MALFUNCTION EL-404

P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-184

P1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-653

P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-193

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

*2: This DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II only.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.

EC-14
 EXIT
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NHEC0002
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of GI
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to INFINITI I30 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer- MA
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision EM
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision). LC
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer. FE
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by intentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the RS section. AT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
AX
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of Engine and A/T SU
NHEC0003
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. BR
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. ST
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, RS
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide- BT
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with HA
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, SC
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. EL

IDX

EC-15
 EXIT
PRECAUTIONS
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System

Engine Fuel & Emission Control System NHEC0004

SEF242X

EC-16
 EXIT
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions

Precautions NHEC0005
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the GI
ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
MA

EM
SEF289H

I When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it LC

securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at left.

FE

AT
SEF908W

I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or AX

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM SU
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
BR

ST
SEF291H
RS
I Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Ref-
erence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-145. BT

HA

SC

MEF040D
EL
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”. IDX
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall
Function Check” should be a good result if the repair is
completed.

SEF217U

EC-17
 EXIT
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.

SEF348N

I Regarding model A33, “-B1” indicates the right bank and

“-B2” indicates the left bank as shown in the figure.

SEF099W

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NHEC0006

When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-10, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-36, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”
I GI-25, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”

EC-18
 EXIT
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

Special Service Tools NHEC0007

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description GI
Tool name

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening front and rear heated oxy-

(J36471-A) gen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
MA
Front heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Rear heated oxygen EM
sensor wrench

LC
NT379

KV10117600 Checking fuel pressure with pressure gauge

(J44321)
Fuel pressure check
adapter
FE

AT
NT777

AX
Commercial Service Tools NHEC0008

Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description SU
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
(J41416) BR

ST

RS
NT703

EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
BT
(J41413-OBD)

HA

SC
NT704

Hose clipper Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the fuel EL
tank and EVAP canister applied to DTC P1440
[EVAP control system (small leak-positive pres-
sure)] IDX

NT720

EC-19
 EXIT
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)

Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure

NT653

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor

NT705

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize
(J-43897-18) lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: J-43897-18 18 mm diameter, for Zirconia
Oxygen Sensor
b: J-43897-12 12 mm diameter, for Titania Oxy-
gen Sensor

NT778

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

(PermatexTM 133AR or when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)

NT779

EC-20
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location

Engine Control Component Parts Location NHEC0009

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF243XA

EC-21
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)

SEF244X

EC-22
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF895X

EC-23
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Engine Control Component Parts Location (Cont’d)

SEF246X

EC-24
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram NHEC0010

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC797C

EC-25
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Diagram NHEC0011
SEF247XA
EC-26
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Vacuum Hose Drawing

Vacuum Hose Drawing NHEC0012

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF249X

Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-26 for Vacuum Control System.

EC-27
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Chart

System Chart NHEC0013

Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Mass air flow sensor Electronic ignition system Power transistor
I Engine coolant temperature sensor Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Ignition switch Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay and FPCM
I Throttle position sensor
I Closed throttle position switch *3 On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
EGR control EGR volume control valve
I Air conditioner switch
I Knock sensor Swirl control valve control solenoid
I EGR temperature sensor *1 Swirl control valve control
valve
I Intake air temperature sensor
I Absolute pressure sensor Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve
I EVAP control system pressure sensor *1
Front heated oxygen sensor heater control Front heated oxygen sensor heater
I Battery voltage
I Power steering oil pressure switch Rear heated oxygen sensor heater control Rear heated oxygen sensor heater
I Vehicle speed sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor *1 EVAP canister purge volume con-
EVAP canister purge flow control
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS) trol solenoid valve
I Rear heated oxygen sensor *2
I TCM (Transmission control module) Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
I Refrigerant pressure sensor Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays
I ABS/TCS control unit
I Electrical load I EVAP canister vent control valve
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system
I Fuel level sensor*1 I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions.

EC-28
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

DESCRIPTION NHEC0014
Input/Output Signal Chart NHEC0014S01
GI
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal) MA

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position

EM
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
LC
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Front heated oxygen sensor Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
Throttle valve idle position

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Fuel injec- FE

tion & mix-
Injectors
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed ture ratio

Ignition switch Start signal

control AT
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

Knock sensor Engine knocking condition

AX
Battery Battery voltage
SU
Absolute pressure sensor Ambient air barometric pressure

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation

BR
Rear heated oxygen sensor* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

ABS/TCS control unit TCS operation command

ST
*: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.

Basic Multiport Fuel Injection System NHEC0014S02 RS

The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined BT
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
Various Fuel Injection Increase/Decrease Compensation HA
NHEC0014S03
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper-
ating conditions as listed below. SC
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine EL
I During acceleration
I Hot-engine operation IDX
I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation

EC-29
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Mixture Ratio Feedback Control (Closed loop control) NHEC0014S04

SEF932V

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con-
trol. The warm-up three way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
a front heated oxygen sensor in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the
front heated oxygen sensor, refer to EC-206. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiomet-
ric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Rear heated oxygen sensor is located downstream of the warm-up three way catalyst. Even if the switching
characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
Open Loop Control NHEC0014S05
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation
I Malfunction of front heated oxygen sensor or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of front heated oxygen sensor at low engine coolant temperature
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I After shifting from “N” to “D”
I When starting the engine
Mixture Ratio Self-learning Control NHEC0014S06
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from the front heated
oxygen sensor. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as
close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled
as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from the front heated oxygen sensor indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN
compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

EC-30
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
Fuel Injection Timing NHEC0014S07

GI

MA

EM
SEF179U
LC
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System NHEC0014S0701
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System NHEC0014S0702
FE
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. AT
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
Fuel Shut-off NHEC0014S08
AX
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System SU
DESCRIPTION NHEC0015
Input/Output Signal Chart NHEC0015S01 BR
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
ST
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

RS
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

BT
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Ignition
Throttle position HA
Throttle position sensor timing con- Power transistor
Throttle valve idle position
trol
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
SC
Ignition switch Start signal

Knock sensor Engine knocking

EL
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position

Battery Battery voltage

IDX

EC-31
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
System Description NHEC0015S02

SEF742M

The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of
the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Com-
puting this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored
in the ECM.
I At starting
I During warm-up
I At idle
I At low battery voltage
I During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
DESCRIPTION NHEC0016
Input/Output Signal Chart NHEC0016S01

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal

Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Air conditioner
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner relay
cut control
Ignition switch Start signal

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation

System Description NHEC0016S02

This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
I At high engine speeds.

EC-32
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Air Conditioning Cut Control (Cont’d)
I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
I When engine speed is excessively low.
I When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. GI
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed) MA
DESCRIPTION NHEC0017
Input/Output Signal Chart NHEC0017S01 EM
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
LC
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position

Throttle position sensor Throttle position Fuel cut

Injectors
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature control
FE
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

AT
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. AX
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-29. SU
Evaporative Emission System
DESCRIPTION NHEC0018
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

SEF569X IDX

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine

EC-33
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is propor-
tionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.

INSPECTION NHEC0019
EVAP Canister NHEC0019S01
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.

SEF396T

Tightening Torque NHEC0019S02

Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP can-
ister and EVAP canister vent control valve.

SEF397T

Fuel Tank Vacuum Relief Valve (Built into fuel fillerNHEC0019S03

cap)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to
−0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF105W CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.

SEF943S

EC-34
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
Vacuum Cut Valve and Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass NHEC0019S04
Valve
Refer to EC-638.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve NHEC0019S05
GI
Refer to EC-406.
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor NHEC0019S06
MA
Refer to EC-320.
EM

Evap Service Port NHEC0019S07 LC

Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.

FE

AT
SEF462UA

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage AX

NHEC0019S08
CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
SU
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE: BR
I Do not start engine.
I Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP
service port may cause a leak. ST
With CONSULT-II NHEC0019S0801
SEF200U
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP RS
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service
port adapter. BT
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II. HA
5) Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
SC
6) Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
PEF838U 7) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure EL
pump.
8) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. IDX

PEF917U

EC-35
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
Without CONSULT-II NHEC0019S0802
1) Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP
service port.
2) Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the
EVAP service port adapter.
3) Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both EVAP
canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
to make a closed EVAP system.
4) To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP sys-
tem until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014
SEF462UA to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5) Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
6) Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37.

SEF254X

EC-36
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING NHEC0020

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF251XA

EC-37
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

SEF253X

EC-38
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) NHEC0606
System Description NHEC0606S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT
SEF206VA

From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value AX
of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor
inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP
canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. SU
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed
and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is
purged during driving. BR
The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same
as conventional system.
WARNING: ST
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
I Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
RS
I Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
I Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION: BT
I Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
a) Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
HA
b) Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-51.
c) Disconnect battery ground cable.
I Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. SC
I Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
I Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
I After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
EL
I Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. IDX

EC-39
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0606S02
Symptom: Fuel Odor from EVAP Canister Is Strong. NHEC0606S0201

1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

SEF596U

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6.
No (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 7.
II)

3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
© GO TO 4.

EC-40
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

4 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. GI
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.

MA

EM

LC

SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: FE
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace water separator.
AX
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
SU
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
© Repair or replace EVAP hose.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-41
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

6 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

SEF142W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

EC-42
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

7 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: GI
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. MA
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector. EM
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down. LC
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF142W
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
HA
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

SC

EL

IDX

EC-43
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.

SEF141W

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

Symptom: Cannot Refuel/Fuel Odor From The Fuel Filler Opening Is Strong While Refueling. NHEC0606S0202
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-44
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

2 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF596U

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © GO TO 6. FE

3 REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

AT
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
© GO TO 4.
AX
4 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
SU
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: SC
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EL
NG © Replace water separator.
IDX
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
© Repair or replace EVAP hose.

EC-45
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

6 CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper
connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

7 CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check signal line and recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace filler neck tube.

8 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.

SEF141W

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 10.
II)
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

EC-46
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

9 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: GI
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel
container. MA
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. EM
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. LC
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF142W

OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. SC

EL

IDX

EC-47
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

10 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FE-5, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose end B), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends A and B using a suitable 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends A and B [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

SEF142W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

11 CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace fuel filler tube.

12 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I

Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.

EC-48
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Evaporative Emission System (Cont’d)

13 CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II

1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. GI
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close.

MA

EM

LC

SEF665U
Do not drop any material into the tank.
FE
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
AT

Positive Crankcase Ventilation AX

DESCRIPTION NHEC0021
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. SU
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to con-
duct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold BR
sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any
blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. ST
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the
SEF372Q crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose con-
necting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. RS
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to
draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the
hose connection in the reverse direction. BT
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all HA
conditions.
SC

SEF559A
EL
INSPECTION NHEC0022
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve NHEC0022S01 IDX
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose
from PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will
be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be
felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.

SEC137A

EC-49
 EXIT
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Cont’d)
PCV Valve Ventilation Hose NHEC0022S02
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

ET277

EC-50
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release

Fuel Pressure Release NHEC0023

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
WITH CONSULT-II GI
NHEC0023S01
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUP- MA
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel EM
SEF289X pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
LC

FE

AT
PEF823K

WITHOUT CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0023S02
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine. SU
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. BR
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
ST
SEF290X
RS
Fuel Pressure Check NHEC0024
I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent BT
parts.
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
HA
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
I Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat-
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. SC
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect fuel tube joint in fuel line and set fuel pressure
check adapter (J44321). EL

IDX

EC-51
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as
shown in the figure.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling:
With vacuum hose connected
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose disconnected
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
SEF570X
If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator
Check.

Fuel Pressure Regulator Check NHEC0025

1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from vacuum gallery.
2. Plug vacuum gallery with a blind cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.

SEF571X

4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as

vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.

SEF718BA

EC-52
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector

Injector
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION NHEC0026
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-20, “TIMING GI
CHAIN”.
3. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as
shown in the figure at left. MA
4. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.
5. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes. EM
SEF702X I Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
I Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
I Do not disassemble or adjust fuel injectors. LC
6. Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator.
I Use bare hands to install O-rings. Do not wear gloves.
I Apply a coat of engine oil (with a low viscosity of 5W-30,
etc.) to O-rings before installation. FE
I Do not use solvent to clean O-rings and other parts.
I Make sure that O-rings and other parts are clean and free
from foreign particles. AT
SEF703X I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools or
finger nails. Do not expand or twist O-rings. If stretched,
do not insert them into fuel tubes immediately after
AX
stretching.
I Always insert O-rings straight into fuel tubes. Do not tilt SU
or rotate them during installation.
7. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned BR
with cutouts of clips after installation.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-53
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Injector (Cont’d)

SEF704X

8. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors.

Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
9. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
I Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
10. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9.3 - 10.8 (1.0 - 1.1, 6.9 - 7.9)
2nd stage:
20.6 - 26.5 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
11. Install all parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
SEF705X
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NHEC0607
IDLE SPEED NHEC0607S01
I Using CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

PEF360V

EC-54
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
IGNITION TIMING NHEC0607S02
Any of following two methods may be used.
I Method A
a) Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. GI
b) Check ignition timing.

MA

EM
SEF260P

I Method B LC
a) Remove No. 1 ignition coil.

FE

AT
SEF247Q

b) Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable AX
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
c) Check ignition timing. SU

BR

ST
SEF248Q
RS

BT

HA

SC

SEF284G
EL

IDX

EC-55
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
How to Check Idle Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)

SEF311Q

Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

Adjustment NHEC0028
PREPARATION NHEC0028S01
1) Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
I Battery
I Ignition system
I Engine oil and coolant levels
I Fuses
I ECM harness connector
I Vacuum hoses
I Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
I Fuel pressure
I Engine compression
I EGR valve operation
I Throttle valve
I Evaporative emission system
2) On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is “OFF”.
3) On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in “N” position.
4) When measuring “CO” percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
5) Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger.
6) Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
7) Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped.

EC-56
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
Overall Inspection Sequence NHEC0028S0101

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEF117W

NOTE: EL
If a vehicle contains a part which is operating outside of design specifications with no MIL illumination,
the part shall not be replaced prior to emission testing unless it is determined that the part has been
tampered with or abused in such a way that the diagnostic system cannot reasonably be expected to IDX
detect the resulting malfunction.

EC-57
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE =NHEC0028S02

1 INSPECTION START
1. Visually check the following:
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
I EGR valve operation
I Electrical connectors
I Gasket
I Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation
2. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U
3. Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.

SEF977U
4. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.
© GO TO 3.

EC-58
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
GI

MA

EM

SEF978U LC
3. Turn off engine and disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.

FE

AT

AX
SEF577X
4. Start and rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run at idle speed.
5. Check ignition timing with a timing light. SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF572X BT
15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
SC
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
EL
Check the following.
I Check camshaft position sensor (REF) and circuit, repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-555.
I Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit, repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-364. IDX
I Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit, repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-356, EC-561.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 3.

EC-59
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

5 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn off engine and connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
2. Start engine and make sure that electrical load switches are “OFF”.
3. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load then run at idle speed.
4. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

PEF357V
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn off engine and connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
2. Start engine and make sure that electrical load switches are “OFF”.
3. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load then run at idle speed.
4. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 9.
II)
NG © GO TO 6.

6 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

Perform test No. 5 again.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 9.
II)
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Check IACV-AAC valve and replace if necessary. Refer to EC-458.
I Check IACV-AAC valve harness and repair if necessary. Refer to EC-458.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
With © GO TO 8.
CONSULT-II
Without © GO TO 9.
CONSULT-II

EC-60
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

8 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “FR O2 MNTR-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. GI
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
MA

EM

LC

PEF358V
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH FE
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 12.
NG (Monitor does not © GO TO 17.
fluctuate.) AX
NG (Monitor fluctuates © GO TO 10.
less than 5 times.)
SU

9 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH SIGNAL

BR
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground. ST
3. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V RS
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
BT
NG (Voltage does not © GO TO 17.
fluctuate.) HA
NG (Voltage fluctuates © GO TO 10.
less than 5 times.)
SC

EL

IDX

EC-61
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

10 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor LH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “FR O2 MNTR-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor LH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 62 and ground.
6. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 13.
II)
NG © GO TO 11.

11 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-52.
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-165.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-664.
Clean or replace if necessary.
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-201.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 3.

EC-62
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

12 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. See “FR O2 MNTR-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the GI
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

MA

EM

LC

PEF358V
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH FE
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END AT
NG (Monitor does not © GO TO 16.
fluctuate.)
AX
NG (Monitor fluctuates © GO TO 14.
less than 5 times.)
SU
13 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RH SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II BR
1. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
2. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm. ST
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG RS
OK © INSPECTION END
NG (Voltage does not © GO TO 16. BT
fluctuate.)
NG (Voltage fluctuates © GO TO 14.
less than 5 times.) HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-63
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

14 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor RH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “FR O2 MNTR-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor RH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 and ground.
6. Make sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000
rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 15.

15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-52.
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-165.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-664.
Clean or replace if necessary.
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-201.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
© GO TO 5.

16 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RH HARNESS

1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor RH harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 and front heated oxygen sensor RH harness connector terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-209.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © GO TO 18.

EC-64
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

17 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH HARNESS

1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor LH harness connector. GI
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and front heated oxygen sensor LH harness connector terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-210.
Continuity should exist. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19. EM
NG © GO TO 18.

LC
18 REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace harness between ECM and front heated oxygen sensor.
© GO TO 5.

FE
19 PREPARATION FOR “CO” % CHECK
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. AT
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Select “COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN” and “Qd”. AX

SU

BR

ST

PEF359V RS

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. BT
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
HA

SC

EL

SEF982UA
IDX

© GO TO 20.

EC-65
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

20 CHECK “CO” %
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.

SEF976U
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.

SEF978U
3. Check “CO” %.
Idle CO: 3 - 11%
4. Without CONSULT-II
After checking CO%,
a. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor.
b. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © GO TO 22.

21 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RH/LH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor RH/LH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. See “FR O2 MNTR-B1/-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace front heated oxygen sensor RH/LH.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine at approx. 2,000 rpm for approx. 2 minutes under no-load.
5. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 63 or 62 and ground.
6. Make sure that voltage fluctuates between 0 - 0.3V and 0.6 - 1.0V more than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 22.

EC-66
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment (Cont’d)

22 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Connect front heated oxygen sensor harness connectors to front heated oxygen sensors.
I Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-52. GI
I Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-165.
I Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-664.
Clean or replace if necessary. MA
I Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-201.
I Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.) EM
© GO TO 5.
Idle Air Volume Learning NHEC0642
LC
DESCRIPTION NHEC0642S01
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air vol-
ume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be
performed under any of the following conditions:
I Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. FE
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PRE-CONDITIONING NHEC0642S02 AT
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of
SEF452Y the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are AX
missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F) SU
I PNP switch: ON
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
BR
On vehicles equipped with daytime running light systems, set
lighting switch to the 1st position to light only small lamps. ST
I Cooling fan motor: Not operating
SEF454Y I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
I Vehicle speed: Stopped RS
I Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP BT
SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less
than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. HA
OPERATION PROCEDURE NHEC0642S03
With CONSULT-II NHEC0642S0301 SC
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
SEF455Y
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order. EL
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
IDX
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
If “INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.

EC-67
 EXIT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)

ITEM SPECIFICATION

Idle speed 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)

Ignition timing 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)

Without CONSULT-II NHEC0642S0302

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITION-
ING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
5. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
6. Wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
SEF260X
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the
problem by referring to the NOTE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION

Idle speed 700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)

Ignition timing 15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)

NOTE:
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully,
proceed as follows:
1) Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2) Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air
leakage.
3) Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory.
(Refer to Basic Inspection, EC-111.)
4) When the above three items check out OK, engine com-
ponent parts and their installation condition are question-
able. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
5) If any of the following conditions occur after the engine
has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and per-
form “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
I Engine stalls.
I Erroneous idle.
I Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.

EC-68
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction

Introduction NHEC0029
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode GI
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979

Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979

MA
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979
EM
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
LC
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable

Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value FE
data Frame data

CONSULT-II X X X X X —

GST X X*1 X — X X AT
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected AX
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-127.)
Two Trip Detection Logic NHEC0030
SU
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored BR
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, ST
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
X: Applicable —: Not Exit
RS
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC

1st trip 2nd trip

Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip BT
Lighting Lighting displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking Blinking
up up

Coolant overtemperature enrich-

HA
— X — — X — X —
ment protection — DTC: P0217

Misfire (Possible three way cata- SC

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - X — — — — — X —
P0306 is being detected

Misfire (Possible three way cata- EL

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — X — — X — —
P0306 is being detected
IDX
Closed loop control
— X — — X — X —
— DTC: P1148, P1168

Fail-safe items (Refer to EC-127.) — X — — X*1 — X*1 —

Except above — — — X — X X —

*1: Except “ECM”

EC-69
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information

Emission-related Diagnostic Information NHEC0031

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC NHEC0031S01
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and
2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL dur-
ing the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-82.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-79. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-109. Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item
requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC NHEC0031S0101
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST does not indicate whether the malfunction
is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify
malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.

SEF698X

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA NHEC0031S02
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed and absolute pressure at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-70
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-95.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior- GI
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- MA
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items EM
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
LC
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

3 1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated FE
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or AT
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged
in the ECM memory. AX
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-82. SU
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE NHEC0031S03
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. BR
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. ST
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT RS
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s BT
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM HA
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the SC
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE: EL
If MIL is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. IDX

EC-71
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SRT Item =NHEC0031S0310
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-
Corresponding
(CONSULT-II indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
DTC No.
tion) ority*2

CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430

EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system (small leak) (negative pressure) P0440

— EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) P1440*1

3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P1447

O2 SENSOR 3 Front heated oxygen sensor (circuit) P0130, P0150

Front heated oxygen sensor (lean shift monitoring) P0131, P0151

Front heated oxygen sensor (rich shift monitoring) P0132, P0152

Front heated oxygen sensor (response monitoring) P0133, P0153

Front heated oxygen sensor (high voltage) P0134, P0154

Rear heated oxygen sensor (min. voltage monitoring) P0137, P0157

Rear heated oxygen sensor (max. voltage monitoring) P0138, P0158

Rear heated oxygen sensor (response monitoring) P0139, P0159

Rear heated oxygen sensor (high voltage) P0140, P0160

O2 SEN HEATER 3 Front heated oxygen sensor heater P0135, P0155

Rear heated oxygen sensor heater P0141, P0161

EGR SYSTEM 3 EGR function (close) P0400

1 EGR function (open) P1402

*1: P1440 [EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) diagnosis] is one type of SRT related diagnosis. This diagnosis, however,
does not contribute to setting the SRT as “CMPLT”, when no malfunction exists in the EVAP system. Therefore, P0440 must be used
instead of P1440.
*2: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.

EC-72
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
SRT Set Timing =NHEC0031S0311
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
GI
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis MA
+ ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON ,

All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)

EM
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)

P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)

LC
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”

Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)

P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)

P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)

FE
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”

NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — — AT

P0402 — — — —

NG AX
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)

(1st trip) DTC SU

1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)

SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” BR

OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
ST
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above RS
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi-
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi- BT
cate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state HA
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. SC
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
EL
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE: IDX
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior
to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure NHEC0031S0312
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

EC-73
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

SEF573XA

*1 EC-70 *2 EC-74 *3 EC-75

How to Display SRT Code NHEC0031S0301

With CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
With GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown below.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.

EC-74
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM
PEF215U

LC
How to Set SRT Code NHEC0031S0302
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table FE
on EC-72.
Without CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
AT
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-75
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Driving Pattern NHEC0031S0303

SEF574X

EC-76
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed GI
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
MA
− Sea level
− Flat road
− Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) EM
− Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed. LC
Pattern 1:
I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminals 70 and 58 is 3.0 - 4.3V).
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminals 70 and 58 is lower than 1.4V). FE
I The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 92 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
AT
I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. AX
Pattern 3:
I The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
SU
I Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
I The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. BR
I If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h ST
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
RS
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times.
I During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. BT
3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the EGR system SRT is set.
HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF414S

*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.

Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON.

EC-77
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) NHEC0031S04
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (30 test
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
X: Applicable —: Not applicable

Test value (GST display)

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application
TID CID

Three way catalyst function

01H 01H Max. X
(Right bank)
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function
03H 02H Max. X
(Left bank)

EVAP control system

05H 03H Max. X
(Small leak)
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP control system purge flow
06H 83H Min. X
monitoring

09H 04H Max. X

0AH 84H Min. X

Front heated oxygen sensor
0BH 04H Max. X
(Right bank)
0CH 04H Max. X

0DH 04H Max. X

11H 05H Max. X

12H 85H Min. X

Front heated oxygen sensor
13H 05H Max. X
(Left bank)
14H 05H Max. X
O2 SENSOR
15H 05H Max. X

19H 86H Min. X

Rear heated oxygen sensor 1AH 86H Min. X

(Right bank) 1BH 06H Max. X

1CH 06H Max. X

21H 87H Min. X

Rear heated oxygen sensor 22H 87H Min. X

(Left bank) 23H 07H Max. X

24H 07H Max. X

EC-78
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

Test value (GST display)

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application
TID CID

Front heated oxygen sensor heater 29H 08H Max. X GI

(Right bank) 2AH 88H Min. X

Front heated oxygen sensor heater 2BH 09H Max. X MA

(Left bank) 2CH 89H Min. X
O2 SENSOR HEATER
Rear heated oxygen sensor heater 2DH 0AH Max. X EM
(Right bank) 2EH 8AH Min. X

Rear heated oxygen sensor heater 2FH 0BH Max. X LC

(Left bank) 30H 8BH Min. X

31H 8CH Min. X

32H 8CH Min. X

EGR SYSTEM EGR function 33H 8CH Min. X

FE
34H 8CH Min. X
AT
35H 0CH Max. X

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS NHEC0031S05 AX

X: Applicable —: Not applicable

Test value/ Test

Items
DTC*1 SRT code limit 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
SU
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
(GST only)

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FUR- BR

THER TESTING MAY BE P0000 — — — —
REQUIRED.

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 — — X EC-165 ST

ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 — — X EC-173

AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 — — X EC-179

RS
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 — — X EC-184
BT
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 — — X EC-189

*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 — — X EC-201

HA
FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0130 X X X*2 EC-206

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0131 X X X*2 EC-216

SC
FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0132 X X X*2 EC-224

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0133 X X X*2 EC-232

EL
FRONT O2 SENSOR-B1 P0134 X X X*2 EC-245

FR O2 SE HEATER-B1 P0135 X X X*2 EC-253 IDX

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0137 X X X*2 EC-260

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0138 X X X*2 EC-270

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0139 X X X*2 EC-280

REAR O2 SENSOR-B1 P0140 X X X*2 EC-290

RR O2 SE HEATER-B1 P0141 X X X*2 EC-298

EC-79
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

Test value/ Test

Items
DTC*1 SRT code limit 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
(GST only)

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0150 X X X*2 EC-206

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0151 X X X*2 EC-216

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0152 X X X*2 EC-224

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0153 X X X*2 EC-232

FRONT O2 SENSOR-B2 P0154 X X X*2 EC-245

FR O2 SE HEATER-B2 P0155 X X X*2 EC-253

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0157 X X X*2 EC-260

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0158 X X X*2 EC-270

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0159 X X X*2 EC-280

REAR O2 SENSOR-B2 P0160 X X X*2 EC-290

RR O2 SE HEATER-B2 P0161 X X X*2 EC-298

FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK1 P0171 — — X EC-305

FUEL SYS-RICH/BK1 P0172 — — X EC-313

FUEL SYS-LEAN/BK2 P0174 — — X EC-305

FUEL SYS-RICH/BK2 P0175 — — X EC-313

FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 — — X EC-320

ENG OVER TEMP P0217 — — X EC-325

MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 — — X EC-343

CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 — — X EC-343

CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 — — X EC-343

CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 — — X EC-343

CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 — — X EC-343

CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 — — X EC-343

CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 — — X EC-343

KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 — — — EC-351

CPS/CIRCUIT (POS) P0335 — — X EC-356

CAM PS/CIRC (PHS) P0340 — — X EC-364

EGR SYSTEM P0400 X X X*2 EC-370

EGR VOL CONT/V CIR P0403 — — X EC-379

TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 X X X*2 EC-386

TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 X X X*2 EC-386

EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 X X X*2 EC-391

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 — — X EC-406

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 — — X EC-412

EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 — — X EC-419

EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 X X X*2 EC-431

FUEL LV SE (SLOSH) P0460 — — X EC-444

EC-80
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

Test value/ Test

Items
DTC*1 SRT code limit 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
(GST only)

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 — — X EC-448 GI

FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0464 — — X EC-450

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 — — X EC-454 MA

IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 — — X EC-458

CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 — — X EC-467

EM
A/T COMM LINE P0600 — — — EC-476

ECM P0605 — — X EC-479

LC
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 — — X AT-103

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 — — X AT-109

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 — — X AT-115

FE
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 — — X AT-121

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 — — X AT-126

AT
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 — — X AT-132

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 — — X AT-138

AX
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 — — X AT-144

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 — — X AT-153 SU

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 — — X AT-158

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 — — X AT-168 BR

SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 — — X AT-174

SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 — — X AT-179 ST

THERMOSTAT FNCTN P1126 — — X EC-481

SWIRL CONT SOL/V P1130 — — X EC-483 RS

CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 — — X EC-507

SWL CON VC SW/CIRC P1165 — — X EC-509 BT

CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 — — X EC-507

TCS C/U FUN TN P1211 — — X EC-515

HA
TCS CIRC P1212 — — X EC-517
SC
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 — — X EC-520

FPCM/CIRCUIT P1220 — — X EC-537

EL
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 — — X EC-544

CPS/CIRCUIT (REF) P1335 — — X EC-555

IDX
CPS/CIRC (POS) COG P1336 — — X EC-561

EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 — — X EC-569

EGR SYSTEM P1402 X X X*2 EC-577

EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 X X X*2 EC-586

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 — — X EC-588

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 — — X EC-600

EC-81
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

Test value/ Test

Items
DTC*1 SRT code limit 1st trip DTC*1 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
(GST only)

EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 X X X*2 EC-608

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 — — X EC-620

FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P1464 — — X EC-629

VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 — — X EC-632

VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 — — X EC-638

A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 — — X EC-650

TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 — — X AT-184

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 — — X EC-653

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 — — X AT-193

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

*2: These are not displayed with GST.
NOTE:
Regarding A33 models, “-B1” and “BK1” indicate right bank and “-B2” and “BK2” indicate left bank.

HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION NHEC0031S06

How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II) NHEC0031S0601
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased
individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).

EC-82
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF966X

ST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
How to Erase DTC ( With GST) RS
NHEC0031S0602
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9), skip step 2. BT
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE HA
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). SC
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx. EL
24 hours.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes IDX
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others

EC-83
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Emission-related Diagnostic Information (Cont’d)
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS) NHEC0031S08

SEF543X

I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNC-
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to “IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)”
in EL section.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
I When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)
initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION NHEC0032

SEF217U

The MIL is located on the instrument panel.

1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MIL does not light up, refer to EL-159, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-699.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.

EC-84
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
On Board Diagnostic System Function =NHEC0032S01
The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status GI
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
“ON” position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
MA

Engine stopped EM

LC
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
I Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
FE
I “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
I “Closed loop control”
I Fail-safe mode AT

Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check NHEC0032S03 AX

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
EL-159, “WARNING LAMPS” or see EC-699.
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning SU
NHEC0032S04

MIL Condition
BR
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.

OFF No malfunction.
ST
OBD System Operation Chart NHEC0033
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS NHEC0033S01 RS
I When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
I When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are BT
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-69.
I The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when HA
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
SC
I The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv- EL
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
I The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip. IDX
SUMMARY CHART NHEC0033S02

Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)

DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no

80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)

EC-85
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)

Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)

1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)

For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-88.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-90.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

EC-86
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” =NHEC0033S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEF392S

EL
*1: When the same malfunction is data will not be displayed any freeze frame data will be cleared
detected in two consecutive trips, longer after vehicle is driven 80 at the moment OK is detected.
MIL will light up. times (pattern C) without the same
malfunction. (The DTC and the
*7: When the same malfunction is IDX
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
driven 3 times (pattern B) without freeze frame data still remain in trip freeze frame data will be
any malfunctions. ECM.) cleared.
*3: When the same malfunction is *5: When a malfunction is detected *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in two consecutive trips, for the first time, the 1st trip DTC vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
the DTC and the freeze frame and the 1st trip freeze frame data without the same malfunction after
data will be stored in ECM. will be stored in ECM. DTC is stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip

EC-87
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NHEC0033S04
<Driving Pattern B> NHEC0033S0401
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C> NHEC0033S0402
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

EC-88
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT
FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”NHEC0033S05

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEF393S

EL
*1: When the same malfunction is *4: The DTC and the freeze frame and the 1st trip freeze frame data
detected in two consecutive trips, data will not be displayed any will be stored in ECM.
MIL will light up. longer after vehicle is driven 40
times (pattern A) without the same
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after IDX
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
driven 3 times (pattern B) without malfunction. without the same malfunction.
any malfunctions. (The DTC and the freeze frame *7: When the same malfunction is
*3: When the same malfunction is data still remain in ECM.) detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
detected in two consecutive trips, *5: When a malfunction is detected trip freeze frame data will be
the DTC and the freeze frame for the first time, the 1st trip DTC cleared.
data will be stored in ECM.

EC-89
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” NHEC0033S06
<Driving Pattern A> NHEC0033S0601

AEC574

I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
I The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B> NHEC0033S0602
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).

EC-90
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II

CONSULT-II =NHEC0034
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NHEC0034S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector, which is located GI
under LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.

MA

EM
SEF289X

3. Turn ignition switch ON. LC

4. Touch “START”.

FE

AT
PBR455D

5. Touch “ENGINE”. AX

SU

BR

ST
PEF895K
RS
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation BT
Manual.

HA

SC

SEF949Y
EL

IDX

EC-91
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL
SYSTEMS APPLICATION NHEC0034S02

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT

Crankshaft position sensor

X X X X
(POS)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) X X X

Mass air flow sensor X X X

Engine coolant temperature sen-

X X X X X
sor

Front heated oxygen sensor X X X X X

Rear heated oxygen sensor X X X X X

Vehicle speed sensor X X X X

Throttle position sensor X X X

Fuel tank temperature sensor X X X X

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

EVAP control system pressure

X X X
sensor

Absolute pressure sensor X X X

EGR temperature sensor X X X

INPUT

Intake air temperature sensor X X X

Knock sensor X

Ignition switch (start signal) X X

Closed throttle position switch X X X

Closed throttle position switch

X X
(throttle position sensor signal)

Air conditioner switch X X

Park/neutral position (PNP)

X X X
switch

Power steering oil pressure

X X
switch

Battery voltage X X

Ambient air temperature switch X X

Load signal X X

Swirl control valve control

X X X
vacuum check switch

Fuel level sensor X X X

EC-92
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE
GI
SUP- MONI- DTC
FREEZE TOR TEST
PORT TOR SRT WORK
DTC*1 FRAME (SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
MA
Injectors X X X
EM
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition X X X
signal)
LC
IACV-AAC valve X X X X

EVAP canister purge volume

X X X X X
control solenoid valve
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Air conditioner relay X X

FE
Fuel pump relay X X X X

Cooling fan X X X X
AT
EGR volume control valve X X X X
OUTPUT

Front heated oxygen sensor

heater
X X X X AX
Rear heated oxygen sensor
X X X X
heater SU
EVAP canister vent control valve X X X X

Vacuum cut valve bypass valve X X X X X BR

Swirl control valve control sole-
X X X X
noid valve
ST
VIAS control solenoid valve X X X

Electronic controlled engine

X X X RS
mount

FPCM X X X X
BT
Calculated load value X X X

X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
HA
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-70.
SC

EL

IDX

EC-93
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
FUNCTION =NHEC0034S03

Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.

Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
Self-diagnostic results
data can be read and erased quickly.*1

Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

Input/Output specifications of the basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (spec)
other data monitor items can be read.

Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.

DTC confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.

ECM part number ECM part number can be read.

*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1) Diagnostic trouble codes
2) 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3) Freeze frame data
4) 1st trip freeze frame data
5) System readiness test (SRT) codes
6) Test values
7) Others

WORK SUPPORT MODE NHEC0034S04

WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” When releasing fuel pressure
DURING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.

EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND When detecting EVAP vapor leak
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE point of EVAP system
IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
I IGN SW “ON”
I ENGINE NOT RUNNING
I AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
I NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP
SYSTEM
I TANK FUEL TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
I WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
I WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE,
CONSULT-II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY
APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE
BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.

TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed

TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ I IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing light.

EC-94
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE NHEC0034S05
DTC and 1st Trip DTC NHEC0034S0501
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS — INDEX” (See EC-9.) GI
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NHEC0034S0502

Freeze frame data MA

Description
item*1

DIAG TROUBLE EM
I The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
CODE
(Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-9.)
[PXXXX]

I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. LC

FUEL SYS-B1*2 I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
FUEL SYS-B2*2 “MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop

CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. FE
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F] AT
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%] schedule. AX
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule SU
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%] than short-term fuel trim.

ENGINE SPEED
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. BR
[rpm]

VHCL SPEED [km/h]

I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph] ST
ABSOL TH·P/S
I The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[degree]
RS
B/FUEL SCHDL
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]

INT/A TEMP SE [°C] BT

I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]

*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. HA
*2: Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.

SC

EL

IDX

EC-95
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE =NHEC0034S06

ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

I Indicates the engine speed computed

ENG SPEED [rpm] q q from the REF signal (120° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (REF).

I Accuracy becomes poor if engine

I Indicates the engine speed computed speed drops below the idle rpm.
CKPS·RPM (POS)
q from the POS signal (1° signal) of the I If the signal is interrupted while the
[rpm]
crankshaft position sensor (POS). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.

I Indicates the number of signal plate

POS COUNT q (Flywheel/Drive Plate) cogs (tooth) dur-
ing one revolution of the engine.

I The signal voltage of the mass air flow I When the engine is stopped, a certain
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] q q
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.

I When the engine coolant temperature

I The engine coolant temperature (deter-
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the
q q enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
[°C] or [°F] engine coolant temperature sensor) is
ant temperature determined by the
displayed.
ECM is displayed.

FR O2 SEN-B1 [V] q q I The signal voltage of the front heated

FR O2 SEN-B2 [V] q oxygen sensor is displayed.

RR O2 SEN-B1 [V] q I The signal voltage of the rear heated

RR O2 SEN-B2 [V] q oxygen sensor is displayed.

I Display of front heated oxygen sensor

FR O2 MNTR-B1 signal during air-fuel ratio feedback
q I After turning ON the ignition switch,
[RICH/LEAN] control:
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture
RICH ... means the mixture became
ratio feedback control begins.
“rich”, and control is being affected
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
toward a leaner mixture.
clamped, the value just before the
FR O2 MNTR-B2 LEAN ... means the mixture became
q clamping is displayed continuously.
[RICH/LEAN] “lean”, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.

I Display of rear heated oxygen sensor

RR O2 MNTR-B1 signal:
q
[RICH/LEAN] RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively I When the engine is stopped, a certain
small. value is indicated.
RR O2 MNTR-B2 LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
q after three way catalyst is relatively
[RICH/LEAN]
large.

I The vehicle speed computed from the

VHCL SPEED SE
q q vehicle speed sensor signal is dis-
[km/h] or [mph]
played.

I The power supply voltage of ECM is

BATTERY VOLT [V] q
displayed.

I The throttle position sensor signal volt-

THRTL POS SEN [V] q q
age is displayed.

I The fuel temperature judged from the

FUEL T/TMP SE
tank fuel temperature sensor signal
[°C] or [°F]
voltage is displayed.

EC-96
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

INT/A TEMP SE
I The intake air temperature determined GI
q by the signal voltage of the intake air
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor is indicated.

I The signal voltage of the EGR tem-

MA
EGR TEMP SEN [V] q q
perature sensor is displayed.

START SIGNAL
q q
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis- EM
[ON/OFF] starter signal. played regardless of the starter signal.

I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF]

CLSD THL/P SW
condition of the closed throttle position
LC
[ON/OFF]
switch.

I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-

CLSD THL POS
q q puted by ECM according to the throttle
[ON/OFF]
position sensor signal.

I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air

FE
AIR COND SIG
q q conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
AT
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
P/N POSI SW
q q park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal. AX
I [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
PW/ST SIGNAL ing oil pressure switch determined by
q q SU
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.

AMB TEMP SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the BR

q q
[ON/OFF] ambient air temperature switch signal.

IGNITION SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-

q ST
[ON/OFF] tion switch.

INJ PULSE-B1
q I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
[msec]
width compensated by ECM according
I When the engine is stopped, a certain RS
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
to the input signals.
[msec]
BT
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board
correction.
HA
I Indicates the ignition timing computed I When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING [BTDC] q
by ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated. SC
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
IACV-AAC/V [step] q value computed by ECM according to
the input signals.
EL
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control IDX
value computed by the ECM according
PURG VOL C/V [%] q
to the input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.

q I When the engine is stopped, a certain

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
value is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle is
I This data also includes the data for the
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] indicated.
air-fuel ratio learning control.

EC-97
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

I The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-

EVAP SYS PRES [V]
tem pressure sensor is displayed.

I The air conditioner relay control condi-

AIR COND RLY
q tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signal) is indicated.

I Indicates the fuel pump relay control

FUEL PUMP RLY
q condition determined by ECM accord-
[ON/OFF]
ing to the input signals.

I Indicates the control condition of the

cooling fan (determined by ECM
COOLING FAN according to the input signal).
q
[ON/OFF] HIGH ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop

I Indicates the EGR volume control value

computed by the ECM according to the
EGR VOL CON/V
q input signals.
[step]
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.

I The control condition of the EVAP can-

ister vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signal) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
I ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open

FR O2 HTR-B1 I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front

[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor heater deter-
FR O2 HTR-B2 mined by ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF] signals.

RR O2 HTR-B1 I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear

[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor heater deter-
RR O2 HTR-B2 mined by ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF] signals.

I The control condition of the vacuum cut

valve bypass valve (determined by
VC/V BYPASS/V ECM according to the input signal) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
I ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed

I “Calculated load value” indicates the

CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.

I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indi-

cates the throttle valve opening angle
ABSOL TH·P/S
computed by ECM according to the sig-
[degree]
nal voltage of the throttle position sen-
sor.

I Indicates the mass airflow computed by

MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of
[g·m/s]
the mass airflow sensor.

I The signal voltage of the absolute pres-

ABSOL PRES/SE [V]
sure sensor is displayed.

EC-98
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

I The control condition of the swirl con- GI

trol valve control solenoid valve (deter-
SWRL CONT S/V mined by ECM according to the input
[ON/OFF] signals) is indicated. MA
I ON ... Swirl control valve is closed.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opened.

I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the EM

electrical load signal and/or lighting
switch.
LOAD SIGNAL LC
q q ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or
[ON/OFF]
lighting switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating
and lighting switch is not on.

TRVL AFTER MIL

I Distance traveled while MIL is activated
[km] or [Mile]
FE
I The voltage between fuel pump and
FPCM DR VOLT [V] q
FPCM is displayed.

I The control condition of the fuel pump

AT
control module (FPCM) (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
FPCM [LOW/HI]
indicated. AX
LOW ... Low amount of fuel flow
HI ... High amount of fuel flow
SU
I The control condition of the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indi-
VIAS S/V cated.
BR
q
[ON/OFF] I OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is ST
operating.

I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the RS

swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch.
SWL CON VC SW ON ... Swirl control valve is not opera- BT
tional.
OFF ... Swirl control valve is opera-
tional.
HA
I The control condition of the electronic
controlled engine mount (computed by
ENGINE MOUNT ECM according to the input signals) is SC
[IDLE/TRVL] indicated.
I IDLE ... Idle condition
I TRVL ... Driving condition EL
I The signal voltage of the fuel level sen-
FUEL LEVEL SE [V]
sor is displayed.
IDX
I Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
IDL A/V LEAN
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
not been performed successfully.

EC-99
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

I Voltage measured by the voltage

Voltage [V]
probe.

I Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to

be measured.
Frequenty I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle I Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
[msec] or [Hz] or [%] measured by the pulse probe. They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
NOTE:
I Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
I Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE NHEC0034S11

PCM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals

I The signal voltage of the mass air flow I When engine is running, specification
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] q q
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.

I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel

B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into I When engine is running, specification
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board range is indicated.
correction.

q I When engine is running, specification

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
range is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle is
I This data also includes the data for the
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] indicated.
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
I Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
I Regarding A33 model, “-B1” indicates right bank and “-B2” indicates left bank.

ACTIVE TEST MODE NHEC0034S07

TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

I Engine: Return to the original

I Harness and connector
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION I Fuel injectors
I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
I Front heated oxygen sensor
tion using CONSULT-II.

I Engine: After warming up, idle

the engine.
IACV-AAC/V Engine speed changes according I Harness and connector
I Change the IACV-AAC valve
OPENING to the opening percent. I IACV-AAC valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.

I Engine: Return to the original I Harness and connector

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP I Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. I Fuel injectors

I Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set I Adjust initial ignition timing
CHECK ITEM.
I Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.

EC-100
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

I Engine: After warming up, idle I Harness and connector

the engine. I Compression
POWER BAL- I A/C switch “OFF”
Engine runs rough or dies.
I Injectors GI
ANCE I Shift lever “N” I Power transistor
I Cut off each injector signal one I Spark plugs
at a time using CONSULT-II. I Ignition coils MA
I Ignition switch: ON I Harness and connector
COOLING FAN I Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops. I Cooling fan motor
“OFF” using CONSULT-II. I Cooling fan relay EM
I Ignition switch: ON
FUEL PUMP
(Engine stopped)
Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connector LC
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
RELAY ing sound. I Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.

I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
EGR VOL EGR volume control valve makes I Harness and connector
CONT/V
I Change EGR volume control
an operating sound. I EGR volume control valve
FE
valve opening step using CON-
SULT-II.

SELF-LEARNING I In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by touching
AT
CONT “CLEAR” on the screen.

I Engine: After warming up, run AX

engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according I Harness and connector
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve to the opening percent. I Solenoid valve SU
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.

FUEL/T TEMP BR
I Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
SEN

I Ignition switch: ON ST
(Engine stopped)
VENT Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
CONTROL/V sound. I Solenoid valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
RS
I Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
BT
VC/V BYPASS/V I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
sound. I Solenoid valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound. HA
I Ignition switch: ON
SWIRL CONT I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
SOL VALVE “OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis- sound. I Solenoid valve SC
ten for operating sound.

I Ignition switch: ON EL
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
VIAS SOL VALVE
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis- sound. I Solenoid valve
ten for operating sound.
IDX
I Engine: After warming up, run
engine at idle speed.
I Gear position: “D”’ range Body vibration changes according I Harness and connector
ENGINE MOUNT-
(Vehicle stopped) to the electronic controlled engine I Electronic controlled engine
ING
I Turn electronic controlled engine mount condition. mount
mount “IDLE” and “RAVEL” with
the CONSULT-II.

EC-101
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

I Ignition switch: ON
“FPCM D/R VOLT” of CONSULT-II
I Select “LOW” and “HI” with
changes as follows; I Harness and connector
FPCM CONSULT-II and check that
LOW ... Approx. 2.4V I FPCM
“FPCM D/R VOLT” of CON-
HI ... Approx. 0.4V
SULT-II changes.

IDLE AIR VOL

I In this test, the idle air volume that keeps the engine within the specified range is memorized in ECM.
LEARN

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE NHEC0034S08

SRT STATUS Mode NHEC0034S0801
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”,
EC-71.
SRT Work Support Mode NHEC0034S0803
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT
while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode NHEC0034S0802

Test mode Test item Condition Reference page

EVAP SML LEAK P0440 EC-391

EVAP SML LEAK P1440 EC-586

EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-588

PURGE FLOW P1447 EC-608

VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 EC-638

FR O2 SEN-B1 P0130 EC-206

FR O2 SEN-B1 P0131 EC-216

FR O2 SEN-B1 P0132 EC-224

FR O2 SEN-B1 P0133 EC-232

FR O2 SENSOR
FR O2 SEN-B2 P0150 EC-206
Refer to corresponding
FR O2 SEN-B2 P0151 trouble diagnosis for EC-216
DTC.
FR O2 SEN-B2 P0152 EC-224

FR O2 SEN-B2 P0153 EC-232

RR O2 SEN-B1 P0137 EC-260

RR O2 SEN-B1 P0138 EC-270

RR O2 SEN-B1 P0139 EC-280

RR O2 SENSOR
RR O2 SEN-B2 P0157 EC-260

RR O2 SEN-B2 P0158 EC-270

RR O2 SEN-B2 P0159 EC-280

EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-370

EGR SYSTEM
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-577

EC-102
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) NHEC0034S10
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
GI
1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time. MA
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” EM
SEF706X in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction detec-
tion is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, LC
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched
on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION FE
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
AT
SEF707X automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM. AX
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows: SU
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA BR
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
ST
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent. RS
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction BT
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI-26,
“Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG” HA
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data SC
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
EL

IDX

EC-103
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

SEF720X

EC-104
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST)

Generic Scan Tool (GST) =NHEC0035

DESCRIPTION NHEC0035S01
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978
has 8 different functions explained on the next page. GI
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual. MA

EM
SEF139P

GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE NHEC0035S02 LC

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under
LH dash panel near the fuse box cover.

FE

AT
SEF289X

3. Turn ignition switch ON. AX

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
SU
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
BR

ST
SEF398S
RS
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-
cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the BT
tool maker.

HA

SC

SEF416S
EL

IDX

EC-105
 EXIT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
FUNCTION NHEC0035S03

Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.

This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-95).]

This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
MODE 3 DTCs
stored by ECM.

This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)

This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.

This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.

This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
I EVAP canister vent control valve open
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
MODE 8 — I Low ambient temperature
I Low battery voltage
I Engine running
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I Low fuel temperature
I Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system

This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.

EC-106
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction

Introduction NHEC0036
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. GI
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with MA
the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are EM
MEF036D
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts. LC
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-109.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe- FE
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used. AT
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
SEF233G
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle. AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF234G
RS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET NHEC0036S01
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make BT
trouble-shooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a HA
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting. SC
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
SEF907L
I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. EL
I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
IDX

EC-107
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Worksheet Sample NHEC0036S0101

MTBL0017

EC-108
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow

Work Flow NHEC0037

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEF510ZE

*1 EC-127 *4 If the on board diagnostic system detected, perform “TROUBLE EL

*2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG cannot be performed, check main DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
RESULTS” is other than “0” or power supply and ground circuit. TENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
“[1t]”, perform “TROUBLE DIAG- Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS *6 EC-76
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-158. IDX
*7 EC-153
INCIDENT”, EC-157. *5 If malfunctioning part cannot be
*3 If the incident cannot be verified,
perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-157.

EC-109
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
DESCRIPTION FOR WORK FLOW NHEC0037S01

STEP DESCRIPTION

Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-108.

Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-82.) The (1st trip) DTC and the
(1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-135.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.

Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
STEP III SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.

Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read
the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The
(1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.

Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-111.) If CONSULT-II is
STEP V
available, perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
— SPECIFICATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-153.) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.)
Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-135.)

Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-139, 145.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI section (“HOW
TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, “Circuit Inspection”).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”,
EC-157.

Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the inci-
STEP VII
dent is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-82.)

EC-110
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection

Basic Inspection NHEC0038

Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied; GI
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF, MA
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
1 INSPECTION START EM
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following: LC
I Harness connectors for improper connections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
FE

AT

AX

SEF983U
SU

© GO TO 2. BR

2 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-I ST

Confirm that there is a clearance between throttle drum and stopper.

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEF622X

OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
IDX
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER FIXING BOLTS
Check throttle opener fixing bolts for loosening.
OK or NG
OK © Repair or replace throttle body assembly.
NG © Retighten the fixing bolts.

EC-111
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENER OPERATION-II

1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Confirm that throttle opener rod moves backward and there is a clearance between throttle drum and throttle opener
rod.

SEF721X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 CHECK VACUUM SOURCE FOR THROTTLE OPENER

1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
2. Check vacuum existance with engine running.

SEF710X

OK or NG
OK © Repair or replace throttle body assembly.
NG © GO TO 6.

EC-112
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

6 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the vacuum hose.
3. Check the vacuum hose for splits, kinks and clogging. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF109L

OK or NG
OK © Clean vacuum port by blowing air. FE
NG © Replace vacuum hose.
AT
7 CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF622X RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
BT
NG © GO TO 8.

HA
8 CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE INSTALLATION
1. Stop engine.
2. Check accelerator wire for slack. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. EL
NG © Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to FE-3, “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”.
IDX
9 CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION
1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
OK © Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
NG © Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.

EC-113
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

10 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I

NOTE:
Always check ignition timing before performing the following.
1. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump as shown below.

SEF793WA
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum is free from the throttle opener
rod.
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 11.
Models without CON- © GO TO 15.
SULT-II

EC-114
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select ”CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure and check the signal. MA

EM

LC

SEF576X FE

AT

AX

SU

PEF577W BR
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 12. RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-115
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

12 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I

With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.

SEF576X
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches to “OFF”.

SEF670X

PEF122W

© GO TO 13.

EC-116
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

13 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches from “OFF” to GI
“ON”, then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.

MA

EM

LC

SEF670X
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge. FE
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/P SW” signal again. AT
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
AX
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 12.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-117
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

14 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY

With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi-
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10.
2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Select “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
6. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
7. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.

SEF864V
8. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to “ON”.

PEF123W

© GO TO 19.

EC-118
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

15 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF711X
I Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum
as shown in the figure.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF576X
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge. BR
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
ST
NG © GO TO 16.
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-119
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

16 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10. During adjustment, vacuum should be applied.
3. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and throttle drum as shown in the figure.

SEF576X

SEF711X
4. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until continuity does not exist.

SEF670X

© GO TO 17.

EC-120
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

17 ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily GI
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.

MA

EM

LC

SEF670X
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity does not exist
when it is opened. FE
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor. AT
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 16. SU

18 RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY BR

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor idle posi- ST
tion memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Confirm that proper vacuum is applied. Refer to Test No. 10.
2. Attach blind cap to vacuum port from which vacuum hose to throttle opener was disconnected. RS
3. Start engine.
4. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.) BT
6. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF864V
7. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
© GO TO 19.

EC-121
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

19 CHECK IGNITION TIMING-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Release vacuum from throttle opener.
3. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener.
4. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely.
5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
6. Stop engine and disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.

SEF577X
7. Start engine.
8. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.

SEF984U
Ignition timing:
15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © GO TO 20.

20 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit and function. Refer to EC-356, 561
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit and function. Refer to EC-555.
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit and function. Refer to EC-364.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © GO TO 21.

21 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace malfunctioning part following the “Diagnostic Procedure” corresponding the detected malfunction.
© GO TO 23.

EC-122
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

22 CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely
the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI GI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-84
© GO TO 23.
MA
23 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67.
EM
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT or INCMP LC
CMPLT © GO TO 19.
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Leaning”.

24 CHECK IGNITION TIMING-II FE

1. Stop engine.
2. Reconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
3. Start engine and let it idle. AT
4. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.

AX

SU

BR
SEF984U
Ignition timing: ST
15°±2° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG RS
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 32.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 35.
II)
BT
NG © GO TO 25.
HA
25 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67. SC
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
EL
CMPLT © GO TO 26.
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
IDX

EC-123
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

26 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN

Check ignition timing again. Refer to Test No. 24.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 32.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 35.
II)
NG © GO TO 27.

27 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an air leak from PCV hose and after IACV-AAC valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 29.
NG © GO TO 28.

28 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
1. Stop engine.
2. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
© GO TO 25.

29 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the IACV-AAC valve circuit and function. Refer to EC-458.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 31.
NG © GO TO 30.

30 REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace malfunction part following the “Diagnostic Procedure” corresponding the detected malfunction.
© GO TO 25.

31 CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-84.
© GO TO 25.

32 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “CKPS·RPM (POS)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 38.
NG © GO TO 33.

EC-124
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)

33 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
GI
CMPLT © GO TO 34.
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. MA

34 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN EM

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “CKPS·RPM (POS)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check idle speed.
LC
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 38.
NG © GO TO 27. FE

35 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

AT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. AX
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 38.
NG © GO TO 36.
BR
36 PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67. ST
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP RS
CMPLT © GO TO 37.
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. BT

37 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

HA
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 38. EL
NG © GO TO 27.

IDX
38 ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”, EC-82 and AT-38, “HOW TO ERASE
DTC”.
© INSPECTION END

EC-125
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Inspection Priority Chart

DTC Inspection Priority Chart NHEC0039

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 I P0100 Mass air flow sensor

I P0110 Intake air temperature sensor
I P0115 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
I P0120 Throttle position sensor
I P0180 Fuel tank temperature sensor
I P0325 Knock sensor
I P0335 P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I P0403 EGR volume control valve
I P0460 P0461 P0464 P1464 Fuel level sensor
I P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
I P0605 ECM
I P1126 Thermostat function
I P1220 Fuel pump control module (FPCM)
I P1320 Ignition signal
I P1335 Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I P1605 A/T diagnosis communication line
I P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

2 I P0105 Absolute pressure sensor

I P0130-P0134, P0150-P0154 Front heated oxygen sensor
I P0135 P0155 Front heated oxygen sensor heater
I P0137-P0140, P0157-P0160 Rear heated oxygen sensor
I P0141 P0161 Rear heated oxygen sensor heater
I P0217 Coolant overtemperature enrichment protection
I P0443 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I P0446 P1446 P1448 EVAP canister vent control valve
I P0450 EVAP control system pressure sensor
I P0510 Closed throttle position switch
I P0705-P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
I P1165 Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I P1401 EGR temperature sensor
I P1447 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
I P1490 P1491 Vacuum cut valve bypass valve

3 I P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function

I P0306 - P0300 Misfire
I P0400 P1402 EGR function
I P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
I P0440 P1440 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
I P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
I P0505 IACV-AAC valve
I P0600 A/T communication line
I P0731-P0734 P0744 A/T function
I P1130 Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I P1148 P1168 Closed loop control

EC-126
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fail-safe Chart

Fail-safe Chart =NHEC0040

The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit. When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode GI
P0100 Mass air flow sensor cir- Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
cuit MA
P0115 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turn-
ture sensor circuit ing ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. EM
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display) LC
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start

More than approx. 4 minutes after

80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) FE

Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)

P0120 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the AT
circuit engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.

Condition Driving condition AX

When engine is idling Normal

When accelerating Poor acceleration

SU
P0403 EGR volume control valve Engine speed will not rise more than 2,800 rpm due to the fuel cut.
circuit BR
P1335 Crankshaft position sensor Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor
(REF) circuit (PHASE) signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be
delayed 0° to 2°. ST
Unable to ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
access ECM The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning. RS
When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condition
in the CPU of ECM), the MIL on the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed. BT
Engine control with fail-safe
When ECM fail-safe is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump operation,
IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are controlled under certain
limitations. HA
ECM fail-safe operation

Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000

SC
Engine speed
rpm

Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system EL

Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve

Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running IDX

Fuel pump
and “OFF” when engine stalls

IACV-AAC valve Full open

Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condition)

Cooling fans when engine is running, and “OFF” when engine
stalls.

Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.

EC-127
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure

Symptom Diagnosis Procedure NHEC0425

AA - HARD/NO START/RESTART NHEC0425S01
Description NHEC0425S0101
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a Hard/No Start/Restart symptom. This will involve
checking the Fuel, Air, Ignition, ECM, Power circuit, Ground circuit, Starting circuit, and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart”, for details.
NOTE:
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) can cause a no/hard start incident. If the security indicator lamp is illumi-
nated when the ignition switch is in the ON position, a NATS malfunction is indicated.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0102
Check the following:
1. Battery, Starter and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits
3. Fuel quality
4. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
5. Engine compression: Spec = 142 - 185 psi at 300 rpm
6. Fuel Injections: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
7. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
8. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT
9. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
10. EGR: Confirm it is not stuck or sticking open
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
11. START SIGNAL input to the ECM
12. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
13. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
14. P0335 - CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
15. P1335 - CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)
16. P0340 - CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
17. PCV system
18. EVAP system
19. IACV-FICD
20. A/C circuit
21. Oil level and condition
22. Intake air leaks
23. Air Filter
24. Engine mechanical components
25. ABS/TCS Control Unit
26. ECM
AB - ENGINE STALL NHEC0425S02
Description NHEC0425S0201
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose an Engine Stall symptom. This will involve checking the
Fuel, Air, Ignition, EGR, ECM and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0202
Check the following:
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits

EC-128
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
3. Fuel quality
4. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL GI
5. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
6. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT MA
7. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
8. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
EM
9. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
10. EGR: Confirm it is not stuck or sticking open
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items: LC
11. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
12. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
13. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
14. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
15. P0335 - CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) FE
16. P1335 - CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)
17. P0500 - VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
AT
18. Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
19. PCV system AX
20. EVAP system
21. IACV-FICD SU
22. A/C circuit
23. Oil level and condition
24. Intake air leaks BR
25. Air Filter
26. Engine mechanical components ST
27. ABS/TCS Control Unit
28. ECM
AC - HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
RS
NHEC0425S03
Description NHEC0425S0301
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a Hesitation/Surging/Flat Spot symptom. This will involve BT
checking the Fuel, Air, Ignition, EGR, ECM and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
HA
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0302
Check the followig:
1. Battery and Alternator SC
2. Main power supply and ground circuits
3. Fuel quality EL
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T) IDX
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. EGR: Confirm it is not stuck or sticking open or operating when conditions call for no EGR. P1402 EGR
SYSTEM
8. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
9. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
10. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-129
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
11. Knock Sensor circuit: P0325 - KNOCK SENSOR
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
12. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
13. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
14. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
15. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
16. P0500 - VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
17. P1706 - PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
18. PCV system
19. EVAP system
20. IACV-FICD
21. A/C circuit
22. Oil level and condition
23. Intake air leaks
24. Air Filter
25. Engine mechanical components
26. ECM
AD - SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION NHEC0425S04
Description NHEC0425S0401
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a Spark Knock/Detonation symptom. This will involve
checking the Ignition and ECM system.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0402
Check the followig:
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits
3. Fuel quality
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. EGR operation: P0400 - EGR SYSTEM
8. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
9. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
10. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
11. Knock Sensor circuit: P0325 - KNOCK SENSOR
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
12. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
13. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
14. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
15. Engine mechanical components
16. ECM
AE - LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION NHEC0425S05
Description NHEC0425S0501
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a Lack of Power/Poor Acceleration symptom. This will
involve checking the Fuel, Ignition, ECM, and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.

EC-130
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0502
Check the followig:
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits GI
3. Fuel quality
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT MA
5. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
EM
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
6. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
7. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING LC
8. EGR: Confirm it is not stuck or sticking open or operating when conditions call for no EGR. P0400 EGR
SYSTEM
9. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
10. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR FE
11. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
12. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
AT
13. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
14. P0500 - VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
15. P1706 - PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH AX
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
16. PCV system
SU
17. EVAP system
18. IACV-FICD
19. A/C circuit BR
20. Oil level and condition
21. Intake air leaks
ST
22. Air Filter
23. Engine mechanical components
24. ABS/TCS Control Unit RS
25. ECM
AF - HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE NHEC0425S06
BT
Description NHEC0425S0601
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a High Idle/Low Idle symptom. This will involve check-
ing the Air, ECM, and other systems. HA
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0602
SC
Check the followig:
1. Battery and Alternator
EL
2. Fuel quality
3. Air intake leaks
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND IDX
ADJUSTMENT
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. IACV-FICD operation
8. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
9. EGR: Confirm that it is not stuck open or leaking exhaust into the intake manifold.
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
EC-131
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
10. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
11. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
12. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
13. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
14. PCV system
15. EVAP system
16. A/C circuit
17. Oil level and condition
18. ECM
AH - IDLE VIBRATION/ROUGH IDLE NHEC0425S07
Description NHEC0425S0701
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose an Idle Vibration/Rough Idle symptom. This will involve
checking the Fuel, Air, Ignition, EGR, ECM, and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0702
Check the followig:
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits
3. Fuel quality
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. EGR: Confirm it is not stuck open
8. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
9. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
10. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:
11. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
12. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
13. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
14. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
15. P1706 - PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
16. Front Engine Mount control
17. Electrical Load signal
18. Power steering oil pressure switch
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
19. PCV system
20. EVAP system
21. IACV-FICD
22. A/C circuit
23. Oil level and condition
24. Intake air leaks
25. Air Filter
26. Engine mechanical components
27. ECM

EC-132
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
AJ - SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE NHEC0425S08
Description NHEC0425S0801
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose a Slow/No Return to Idle symptom. This will involve
checking the Air, ECM, and other systems. GI
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details.
Diagnostic Repair Procedure
Check the followig:
NHEC0425S0802 MA
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Fuel quality EM
3. Air intake leaks
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT LC
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. IACV-FICD operation
8. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged. FE
9. EGR: Confirm that it is not stuck open or leaking exhaust into the intake manifold.
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items: AT
10. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
11. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
12. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AX
13. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause SU
14. PCV system
15. EVAP system
16. A/C circuit BR
17. Oil level and condition
18. ECM ST
AL - EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION NHEC0425S09
Description NHEC0425S0901 RS
This describes the operations necessary to diagnose an Excessive Fuel Consumption symptom. This will
involve checking the Fuel, Air, Ignition, ECM, and other systems.
Refer to “Symptom Matrix Chart” for details. BT
Diagnostic Repair Procedure NHEC0425S0902
Check the followig: HA
1. Battery and Alternator
2. Main power supply and ground circuits
3. Fuel quality SC
4. Base Idle speed, ignition timing and throttle position sensor adjustment: BASIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENT EL
5. Target idle speed: Spec = 625±50 rpm (A/T)/700±50 rpm (M/T)
6. IACV-AAC Valve operation: Use CONSULT-II, ENGINE - ACTIVE TEST - IACV-AAC/V OPENING
7. Fuel Pump and Fuel Pressure Regulator operation: Gauge should read 34 psi at idle and 43 psi when fuel IDX
pressure regulator vacuum hose is disconnected and plugged.
For inoperative Fuel Pump refer to FUEL PUMP CONTROL
8. Fuel Injectors: INJECTOR NON-DETECTABLE
9. Ignition signal: P1320 - IGNITION SIGNAL
10. EGR operation: P1402 - EGR SYSTEM
11. Knock Sensor circuit: P0325 - KNOCK SENSOR
Use CONSULT-II to check the operation of the following items:

EC-133
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Diagnosis Procedure (Cont’d)
12. P0100 - MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
13. P0131 - FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
14. P0125 - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
15. P0120 - THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
16. P0500 - VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
17. P1706 - PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Other items to be checked as possible malfunction cause
18. PCV system
19. EVAP system
20. IACV-FICD
21. A/C circuit
22. Oil level and condition
23. Intake air leaks
24. Air Filter
25. Engine mechanical components
26. ECM

EC-134
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart

Symptom Matrix Chart NHEC0041

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM NHEC0041S01

SYMPTOM
GI

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
MA

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

EM

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
LC

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
FE

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

AT
Fuel Fuel pump circuit EC-537,
1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2
674
AX
Fuel pressure regulator sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-52
tem

Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-664 SU

Evaporative emission system EC-33

Air Positive crankcase ventilation 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BR

1 EC-49
system 3 3

Incorrect idle speed adjust-

1 1 1 1 1 EC-111 ST
ment

IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-458

RS
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjust-
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-111
ment

Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-544

BT
EGR EGR volume control valve cir-
2 EC-379
cuit 2 HA
EGR system EC-370,
1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 577
2
SC
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 EC-158
2 3 3 3
Air conditioner circuit 3 3 2 HA section
EL
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
IDX

EC-135
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Engine Crankshaft position sensor

EC-555
control (REF) circuit
2 2
Crankshaft position sensor EC-356,
(POS) circuit 561

Camshaft position sensor EC-364

3
(PHASE) circuit

Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 2 EC-165

Front heated oxygen sensor

EC-206
circuit
1 2 3 2 2 2 2
Engine coolant temperature EC-184,
1 3 3
sensor circuit 201

Throttle position sensor circuit 2 2 EC-189

Incorrect throttle position sen-

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-111
sor adjustment

Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-454

Knock sensor circuit 2 EC-351

3
ECM EC-479,
2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
127

Start signal circuit 2 EC-670

Park/Neutral position switch

3 3 3 EC-653
circuit

Power steering oil pressure

2 EC-684
switch circuit 3 3
Electronic controlled engine
EC-680
mount control circuit

Electrical load signal circuit EC-693

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

(continued on next page)

EC-136
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER NHEC0041S02

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

GI

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
MA

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

EM
Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
section

IDLING VIBRATION
LC

ENGINE STALL
FE
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel tank FE section AT

5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5

Vapor lock
5 AX
Valve deposit

Poor fuel (Heavy weight 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 SU

gasoline, Low octane)
—
Air Air duct
BR
Air cleaner

Air leakage from air duct ST

(Mass air flow sensor —
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle body)
5 5 5 5 RS
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section

Air leakage from intake

—
manifold/Collector/Gasket
BT
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit EL section HA
Starter circuit 3

Drive plate 6 EM section SC

PNP switch 4 AT section

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. EL

(continued on next page)

IDX

EC-137
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
section

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Engine Cylinder head

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3

Cylinder block

Piston 4

Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
EM section
Bearing

Crankshaft

Valve Timing chain

mecha-
nism Camshaft
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve

Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/

Muffler/Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst

Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/ MA, EM, LC

tion Oil filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 section

Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LC section

Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler

cap

Thermostat 5

Water pump
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery

Cooling fan 5 EC section

Coolant level (low)/

MA section
Contaminated coolant

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

EC-138
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
GI

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

MA

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
EM

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

section

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
LC

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA FE

IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System EC-84 or
1 1
— NATS) EL section
AT
ABS/TCS control unit EC-515,
2 2 2 2 2 EC-517 or
BR section AX
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

SU

BR

ST

RS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
Remarks:
NHEC0042
BT
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. HA
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. SC
I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow sensor,
first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

EL
I Tachometer: Connect
ENG SPEED Almost the same speed as
CKPS·RPM (POS)
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
the CONSULT-II value.
IDX
value.

POS COUNT I Engine: Running 179 - 181

I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.2 - 1.8V

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
MAS A/F SE-B1
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V

COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)

EC-139
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B2 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -

FR O2 SEN-B1 1.0V
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B2 rpm
Changes more than 5 times
FR O2 MNTR-B1
during 10 seconds.

RR O2 SEN-B1 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -

RR O2 SEN-B2 Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 1.0V
I Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
RR O2 MNTR-B2

I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
SULT-II value the CONSULT-II value

BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V

I Engine: After warming up, idle

Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
the engine
THRTL POS SEN I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)

EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF

CLSD THL POS I Engine: After warming up, idle Throttle valve: Idle position ON
CLSD THL/P SW the engine Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF

Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF

I Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: “ON”
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)

Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON

P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF

Steering wheel in neutral position

I Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
the engine
The steering wheel is turned ON

I Ignition switch: ON Below 19°C (66°F) OFF

AMB TEMP SW I Compare ambient air tempera-
ture with the following: Above 25°C (77°F) ON

IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON ON , OFF , ON

I Engine: After warming up Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec

INJ PULSE-B2 I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
INJ PULSE-B1 I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec

I Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
B/FUEL SCHDL
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec

I Engine: After warming up Idle 15° BTDC

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
IGN TIMING
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC

EC-140
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up Idle 2 - 10 step

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
IACV-AAC/V GI
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm —

I Engine: After warming up

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Idle 0% MA
PURG VOL C/V
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm —
EM
A/F ALPHA-B2 Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up 54 - 155%
A/F ALPHA-B1 rpm

EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V

LC
AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON

I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)

ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I Engine running and cranking

Except as shown above OFF FE

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less AT
I After warming up engine, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine. between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C Low
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” (219°F) AX
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
HIGH
(221°F) or more
SU
I Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: “N” Engine speed: Revving from idle up
10 - 55 step
BR
I No-load to 3,000 rpm quickly

VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

ST
FR O2 HTR-B1 I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
FR O2 HTR-B2 I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF RS
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
OFF
RR O2 HTR-B1 I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
RR O2 HTR-B2
BT
I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm [After driving for 2 minutes at a speed
ON
of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more]

VC/V BYPASS/V Ignition switch: ON OFF HA

I Engine: After warming up Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” SC
CAL/LD VALUE
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%

I Engine: After warming up Throttle valve: fully closed 0.00° EL

ABSOL TH·P/S I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80.0° IDX
(Engine stopped)

I Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
MASS AIRFLOW
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s

ABSOL PRES/SE I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 4.4V

EC-141
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I When cranking engine HI

FPCM
I Idle at coolant temperatures above 10°C (50°F) LOW

I When cranking engine Approx. 0.4V

FPCM DR VOLT
I Idle at coolant temperatures above 10°C (50°F) Approx. 2.4V

Engine coolant temperature is

between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C ON
SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle (122°F).

Engine coolant temperature is above

OFF
50°C (122°F).

I Engine speed: Idle

OFF
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
SWL CON VC SW
I Engine speed: Idle
ON
I Engine coolant temperature is between 55°C (131°F).

Idle “IDLE”
ENGINE MOUNT I Engine: Running
2,000 rpm “TRVL”

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0043
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL/P SW NHEC0043S01
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL/P SW” when depressing the
accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL/P SW” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.

SEF877X

CMPS·RPM (REF), MAS AIR/FL SE, THRTL POS SEN, RR O2 SEN-B1, FR O2 SEN-B1, INJ
PULSE-B1 NHEC0043S02
Below is the data for “CMPS·RPM (REF)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “RR O2 SEN-B1”, “FR O2
SEN-B1” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up
engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

EC-142
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SEF935QA
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-143
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode (Cont’d)

SEF936Q

EC-144
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value

ECM Terminals and Reference Value NHEC0044

PREPARATION NHEC0044S01
1. ECM is located behind the instrument lower cover. For this
inspection, remove instrument lower cover. GI

MA

EM
SEF575X

2. Remove ECM harness protector. LC

FE

AT

3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con- AX

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
SU
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
BR

ST
MEC486B
RS
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNHEC0044S02

BT

HA

SC

SEF970W
EL

ECM INSPECTION TABLE NHEC0044S03 IDX

Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and 48 (ECM ground).

EC-145
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
I Idle speed

EVAP canister purge SEF994U

1 PU/R volume control sole-
noid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine).

SEF995U

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
Front heated oxygen I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
2 R/L
sensor LH heater [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
Front heated oxygen I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
3 OR/L
sensor RH heater [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
Rear heated oxygen (43 MPH) or more.
4 R/L
sensor LH heater [Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
0 - 1.0V
I After driving for 2 minutes at a speed of 70 km/h
Rear heated oxygen (43 MPH) or more.
5 P/B
sensor RH heater [Ignition switch “ON”]
I Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
I Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

6 W/PU
7 Y/B [Engine is running]
IACV-AAC valve 0.1 - 14V
8 Y I Idle speed
17 GY/L

9 G
10 L/B EGR volume control [Engine is running]
0.1 - 14V
18 BR valve I Idle speed
19 P

EC-146
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE GI

VIAS control solenoid I Idle speed (11 - 14V)
16 Y/G
valve [Engine is running]
I Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
0 - 1.0V MA
0 - 0.2V★
EM
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition LC
I Idle speed
21 Y/R Ignition signal No. 1
22 G/R Ignition signal No. 2
SEF399T
23 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
30 GY Ignition signal No. 4 0.1 - 0.3V★
31 PU/W Ignition signal No. 5 FE
32 GY/R Ignition signal No. 6
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition AT
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

AX
SEF645T

10 - 11V★
SU
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition BR
I Idle speed

ST
SEF579X
25 W/G Tachometer
10 - 11V★
RS
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition BT
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

HA
SEF580X

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] SC
0 - 1.5V
I For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay “OFF”
26 W/B
(Self shutt-off) EL
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I A few seconds passed after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
IDX
[Engine is running]
I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” 0 - 1.0V
27 B/R Air conditioner relay (Compressor is operating).

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

I A/C switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V)

EC-147
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

[Ignition switch “ON”]

I For 1 second after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
28 B/P Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch “ON”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I 1 second passed after turning ignition switch
(11 - 14V)
“ON”.

[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
Swirl control valve con- 50°C (59 to 122°F).
29 G
trol solenoid valve [Engine is running]
I Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Engine coolant temperature is above 50°C (11 - 14V)
(122°F).

[When cranking engine] Approximately 0.4V

33 L/W FPCM [Engine is running]

I Warm-up condition Approximately 10V
I Idle speed

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
Cooling fan relay I Cooling fan is operating at high speed.
34 LG
(High) [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
I Cooling fan is operating.
35 BR/R Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

38 LG/B MIL [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Idle speed (11 - 14V)

Vacuum cut valve BATTERY VOLTAGE

39 OR/G [Ignition switch “ON”]
bypass valve (11 - 14V)

EVAP canister vent BATTERY VOLTAGE

40 OR/L [Ignition switch “ON”]
control valve (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V

42 BR/W Start signal
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 12V

[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V

43 R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch “ON”]

Approximately 0V
I Gear position is “P” or “N”.
44 G/OR PNP switch
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Air conditioner switch I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
45 G/B
signal [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I A/C switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V)

EC-148
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running] GI
I Idle speed
0V
I Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
Ambient air tempera- I Air conditioner is operating. MA
46 W/L
ture switch signal [Engine is running]
I Idle speed
I Ambient air temperature is above 25°C (77°F).
Approximately 5V EM
I Air conditioner is not operating.

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V LC
Power steering oil I Steering wheel is being turned.
47 G
pressure switch [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Steering wheel is not being turned. (11 - 14V)

Engine ground
[Engine is running]
48 B ECM ground
I Idle speed
[Probe this terminal with (–) FE
tester probe when measuring]

[Engine is running]
Electronic controlled I Idle speed
0 - 1.0V AT
49 W
engine mount-1 [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
I Except the above (11 - 14V) AX
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
Electronic controlled I Idle speed (11 - 14V)
50 W/R
engine mount-2
SU
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
I Except the above

[Engine is running] BR
51 PU A/C cut signal 0 - 0.5V
I Air conditioner is operating.

[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE ST
I Rear window defogger: ON
(11 - 14V)
52 W/G Electrical load signal I Hi-beam headlamp: ON

[Engine is running] RS
0V
I Electrical load: OFF

[Engine is running] BT
I Idle speed
Approximately 5V
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15 to
Swirl control valve con- 50°C (59 to 122°F).
55 W/B trol vacuum check HA
switch [Engine is running]
I Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
I Engine coolant temperature is above 50°C SC
(122°F).

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

EL
Throttle position switch I Accelerator pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
56 GY/L
(Closed position) [Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
I Accelerator pedal depressed IDX
[Engine is running]
57 B ECM ground Engine ground
I Idle speed

[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors’ ground I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
I Idle speed

Fuel level sensor [Engine is running]

59 B Approximately 0V
ground I Idle speed

EC-149
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.2 - 1.8V
I Idle speed
61 W Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 1.6 - 2.2V
I Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-

odically change)

[Engine is running]
Front heated oxygen
62 W I Warm-up condition
sensor LH
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF059V

0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-

odically change)

[Engine is running]
Front heated oxygen
63 W I Warm-up condition
sensor RH
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEF059V

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
64 Y/G [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature.

Approximately 2.3V★
(AC voltage)

[Engine is running]
65 W Crankshaft position
I Warm-up condition
75 W sensor (REF)
I Idle speed

SEF581X

Approximately 4.2V★
(AC voltage)

[Engine is running]
66 W Camshaft position sen-
I Warm-up condition
76 W sor (PHASE)
I Idle speed

SEF582X

Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE

67 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tem-
70 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
perature sensor
engine coolant temperature.

EC-150
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Rear heated oxygen

[Engine is running] GI
71 W I Warm-up condition 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sensor LH
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

[Engine is running]
MA
Rear heated oxygen
72 W I Warm-up condition 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sensor RH
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
EM
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor
73 B I Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
I Idle speed LC
[Ignition switch “ON”] Less than 4.5V
EGR temperature sen- [Engine is running]
74 SB
sor I Warm-up condition 0 - 1.5V
I EGR system is operating.

Absolute pressure sen-

FE
80 W [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 4.4V
sor

[Engine is running] AT
Refrigerant pressure I Warm-up condition
81 W 0.36 - 3.88V
sensor I Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
(Compressor operates.) AX
[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition Approximately 0.4V
82 W
Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released SU
signal output
[Ignition switch “ON”]
Approximately 4V
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed BR
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
83 G Fuel level sensor [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with
fuel level. ST
EVAP control system
84 W [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 3.4V
pressure sensor
RS
Approximately 2.4V

BT
[Engine is running]
I Idle speed
HA

85 W
Crankshaft position SEF057V
SC
sensor (POS) Approximately 2.3V

EL
[Engine is running]
I Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
IDX

SEF058V

EC-151
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 2.5V

[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 1st gear position
I 10 km/h (6 MPH)

SEF583X
86 P/L Vehicle speed sensor
Approximately 2.0V

[Engine is running]
I Jack up front wheels.
I In 2nd gear position
I 30 km/h (19 MPH)

SEF584X

[Engine is running]
I Warm-up condition 0.15 - 0.85V
91 L/W Throttle position sensor I Accelerator pedal fully released
[Ignition switch “ON”]
3.5 - 4.7V
I Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Fuel tank temperature
92 P/L [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
fuel tank temperature.

[Engine is running]
93 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
I Idle speed

[When cranking engine] Approximately 0V

94 G/R FPCM check [Engine is running]

I Warm-up condition Approximately 2.4V
I Idle speed

101 R/B Injector No. 1

102 L/W Injector No. 5
103 R/W Injector No. 2 [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 PU/R Injector No. 6 I Idle speed (11 - 14V)
105 R/Y Injector No. 3
107 R/L Injector No. 4

106 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground
108 B I Idle speed

110 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE

Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
112 R/G (11 - 14V)

111 R Sensors’ power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V

Communication line [Engine is running]

114 Y/B Approximately 2V
(LAN) I Idle speed

[Ignition switch “ON”]

115 OR Data link connector Approximately 2V
I CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.

★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

EC-152
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description

Description NHEC0648
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in GI
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MA
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- EM
rection)
I A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) LC
Testing Condition NHEC0649
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) FE
I Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1
I Electrical load: Not applied*2 AT
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T or CVT models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until AX
“FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T or CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates less than 0.9V. For M/T models, drive
vehicle for 5 minutes after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Cooling fans are not oper- SU
ating. Steering wheel is straight ahead.

BR

ST

RS
Inspection Procedure NHEC0650
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale dis- BT
play.
1. Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
HA
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F
SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. SC
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-154.
SEF601Z
EL

IDX

EC-153
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0651

SEF613ZA

EC-154
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF768Z

EC-155
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

SEF615Z

EC-156
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description

Description NHEC0045
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I GI
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area. MA
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS NHEC0045S01

STEP in Work Flow Situation EM

II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.

III The symptom described by the customer does not recur. LC

IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.

VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.

FE

AT

Diagnostic Procedure AX
NHEC0046

1 INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION — RELATED INFORMATION”, EC-82.
SU
© GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. ST
Refer to GI-31, “GROUND INSPECTION”.
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.
BT
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-26, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
SC
NG © Repair or replace.
EL
4 CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-23, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. IDX
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair or replace connector.

EC-157
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM NHEC0047

MEC798C

EC-158
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

MEC717C BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF649X

EC-159
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NHEC0049

1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF291X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19, E89
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
© Repair harness or connectors.

4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-160
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II

1. Disconnect ECM relay.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF589PB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 2, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

FE

AT

AX
SEF292X

OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6. BR

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART ST

Check the following.
I 15A fuses
I Joint connector-13 RS
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HA
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 26 and ECM relay terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
SC
OK or NG
OK © Go to “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”, EC-544.
EL
NG © GO TO 8.

IDX
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-161
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

9 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Stop engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF293X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.

10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF294X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage © GO TO 12.
does not exist.)
NG (Battery voltage © GO TO 14.
exists for more than a
few seconds.)

EC-162
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

12 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

1. Disconnect ECM relay.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF589PB
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

FE

AT

AX
SEF295X

OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13. BR

13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART ST

Check the following.
I Joint connector-13
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 15A fuse RS
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
14 CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ECM relay terminal 5. HA
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
EL
NG © GO TO 15.

IDX
15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-163
 EXIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

16 CHECK ECM RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.

SEF296X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ECM relay.

17 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 48, 57, 106, 108 and engine ground.
Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-164
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0050

The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric GI
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the MA
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM EM
SEF987W
detects the air flow by means of this current change.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor LC

Mode NHEC0051
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
Idle 1.2 - 1.8V FE
MAS AIR/FL SE
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.2V
AT
Idle 14.0 - 33.0%
CAL/LD VALUE ditto
2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0%
AX
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW ditto
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s SU

BR

ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0053
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively high voltage from the sensor is BT
sent to ECM when engine is not running,
(Malfunction B) an excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM when engine is running, HA
(Malfunction C) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition,
(Malfunction D) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM SC
under heavy load driving condition,
(Malfunction E) a voltage from the sensor is constantly approx.
1.0V when engine is running. EL
FAIL-SAFE MODE NHEC0053S02
When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode IDX
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

EC-165
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Possible Cause

Possible Cause NHEC0426

MALFUNCTION A OR C NHEC0426S01
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION B, D OR E NHEC0426S02
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air leaks
I Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0054
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first.
If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B AND E”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no problem on ”PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
C”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0054S01

With CONSULT-II NHEC0054S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-170.
With GST NHEC0054S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF360V

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND E NHEC0054S02

With CONSULT-II NHEC0054S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-170.
With GST NHEC0054S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF357V

EC-166
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is confirmed after more than 5 seconds, there may
be malfunction C.
GI

MA

EM

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C NHEC0054S03 LC

NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with
engine stopped (Ignition switch “ON”) instead of running engine at
idle speed.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0054S0301 FE
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
PEF361V 4) Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, AX
EC-170.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
NHEC0054S0302
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-167
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D NHEC0054S04
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0054S0402
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-170.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONITOR”.
5) Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6) Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-170.
If OK, go to following step.
7) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
CKPS·RPM (POS) More than 2,000 rpm

THRTL POS SEN More than 3V

Selector lever Suitable position

SEF998NC
Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)
will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.

8) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,

EC-170.

PEF362V

Overall Function Check NHEC0055

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION D NHEC0055S01
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be con-
firmed.
With GST NHEC0055S0101
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
3) Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
SEF534P 4) Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-170.

EC-168
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0056

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
MEC799C

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF650X

EC-169
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0057

1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, B, C, D or E) is duplicated?

MTBL0373

Type I or Type II
Type I © GO TO 3.
Type II © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Reconnect the parts.

3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 4.

EC-170
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (MAFS) harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF256X
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between MAFS terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

FE

AT

AX

SEF297X SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. BR
NG © GO TO 5.

ST
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor RS
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors. BT

6 CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

HA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 3 and ECM terminal 73. SC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
IDX
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-171
 EXIT
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between MAFS terminal 1 and ECM terminal 61.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.

SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.

9 CHECK MAFS SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I Joint connector-18
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-172
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0058

The absolute pressure sensor detects ambient barometric pressure
and sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure
increases, the voltage rises. GI

MA

EM
SEF052V

LC

FE

AT
SEF946S

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0059
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM. SU

BR

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0427
I Harness or connectors
(Absolute pressure sensor circuit is open or shorted.) BT
I Absolute pressure sensor
HA

SC

EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0060
NOTE: IDX
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

EC-173
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0060S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-176.
WITH GST NHEC0060S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

PEF360V

EC-174
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0062

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
MEC800C

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF651X

EC-175
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0063

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 2.

2 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor harness connector.

SEF257X
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace harness connector.

EC-176
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF299X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair harness or connectors. FE

4 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT AT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. AX
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
BR

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART ST

Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor RS
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and absolute pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
6 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. HA
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 80 and absolute pressure sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. EL
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
IDX

EC-177
 EXIT
DTC P0105 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.

SEF300X
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor.

8 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-178
 EXIT
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0064

The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM. GI
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. MA
<Reference data>
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ EM
SEF258X
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
LC
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 64
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 48 (ECM ground).

FE

AT
SEF012P

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0065
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sen- SU
sor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent
to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant BR
temperature sensor.

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0428
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) BT
I Intake air temperature sensor
HA

SC

EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0066
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip IDX
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

EC-179
 EXIT
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0066S01
With CONSULT-II NHEC0066S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
With GST NHEC0066S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF360V

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0066S02

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0066S0201
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C
(194°F).
PEF233U
a) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c) Check the engine coolant temperature.
d) If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C
(194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool down engine.
I Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature
is above 90°C (194°F).
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine.
5) Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100
consecutive seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-182.
With GST NHEC0066S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-180
 EXIT
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0067

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC801C

EC-181
 EXIT
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0068

1 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sensor harness connector.

SEF258X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground.

SEF301X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor
© Repair harness or connectors.

3 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-182
 EXIT
DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and intake air temperature sensor GI
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and intake air temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MA
5 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF302X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
ST
NG © Replace intake air temperature sensor.
RS
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. BT
© INSPECTION END
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-183
 EXIT
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0069

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF594K

<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)

−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4

20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00

90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
SEF012P (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 48 (ECM ground).
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0070
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage
from the sensor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE NHEC0070S02
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
“ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II

Condition
display)
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)

More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or

80°C (176°F)
Start

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)

Possible Cause NHEC0429

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor

EC-184
 EXIT
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure =NHEC0071

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
NHEC0071S01
MA
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds. EM
PEF360V 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-187.
LC
WITH GST NHEC0071S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-185
 EXIT
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0072

MEC802C

EC-186
 EXIT
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0073

1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF259X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF585X
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ST

2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND CIRCUIT RS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground. BT
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
SC
NG © GO TO 3.

EL
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor IDX
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-187
 EXIT
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS) (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

SEF304X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-188
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description

Description NHEC0074
NOTE:
If DTC P0120 is displayed with DTC P0510, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510. Refer to
EC-467. GI
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0074S01
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
MA
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
EM
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

AEC929 ST
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode RS
NHEC0075
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION BT
I Engine: After warming up, idle
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
the engine HA
THRTL POS SEN I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped) SC
I Engine: After warming up, idle
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.00°
the engine EL
ABSOL TH·P/S I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80.0°
(Engine stopped) IDX

EC-189
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0077

Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low or high voltage from the sen-
sor is sent to ECM,
(Malfunction B) a high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving conditions,
(Malfunction C) a low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving conditions.
FAIL-SAFE MODE NHEC0077S02
When the malfunction A is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode
and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Throttle position sensor Condition Driving condition
circuit
When engine is idling Normal

When accelerating Poor acceleration

Possible Cause NHEC0430

MALFUNCTION A NHEC0430S01
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
MALFUNCTION B NHEC0430S02
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
I Fuel injector
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Mass air flow sensor
MALFUNCTION C NHEC0430S03
I Harness or connectors
(The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air leaks
I Throttle position sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0078

NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the
1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNC-
TION B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC-190
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0078S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION: GI
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in MA
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
EM

With CONSULT-II NHEC0078S0101 LC

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed More than 4 km/h (2 MPH) FE
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N” position

3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, AT

PEF775U EC-195.
With GST NHEC0078S0102
AX
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SU

BR

ST

RS
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0078S02
With CONSULT-II NHEC0078S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. BT
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. HA
If idle speed is over 1,000 rpm, maintain the following condi-
tions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed below 1,000
rpm. SC
Selector lever Suitable position except “P” or “N”
PEF357V Brake pedal Depressed EL
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, IDX

EC-195.
With GST NHEC0078S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-191
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C NHEC0078S03
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0078S0301
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
PEF024P 5) Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Press RECORD on CONSULT-II SCREEN at the same time
accelerator pedal is depressed.
7) Print out the recorded graph and check the following:
I The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal
depression.
I The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed is
approximately 4V.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-195.
If OK, go to following step.
8) Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
9) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF) More than 2,000 rpm

MAS AIR/FL SE More than 3.2V

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)

Selector lever Suitable position

Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)

will help maintain the driving conditions
SEF021PA required for this test.

10) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,

EC-195.

PEF776U

EC-192
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
With GST =NHEC0078S0302
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds. GI
Gear position Suitable position

Engine speed More than 2,000 rpm MA

Engine coolant temperature More than 70°C (158°F)

Voltage between ECM termi- More than 3.2V EM

SEF305X nal 91 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground
LC
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-195.

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-193
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0079

MEC803C

SEF652X

EC-194
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0080

1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction A, B or C is duplicated?
GI

MA
MTBL0066
EM
Type A, B or C
Type A or B © GO TO 4.
LC
Type C © GO TO 2.

2 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.
FE

AT

AX
MTBL0382

© GO TO 3. SU

3 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM. BR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the following for connection.
I Air duct ST
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Reconnect the parts. BT

4 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS HA

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
SC

EL

IDX

SEF255X

© GO TO 5.

EC-195
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.

SEF260X
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF306X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-196
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 91 and throttle position sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 10. EM
II)
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. LC

9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). FE
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of AT
the throttle opener.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF307X

OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

EC-197
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.

MTBL0231

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

11 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

MTBL0382

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

EC-198
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconneted.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor. AT

13 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) AX

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0335 and P1336. Refer to EC-357, 562.
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
BR

14 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF) ST

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P1335. Refer to EC-556.
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF). BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-199
 EXIT
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.

SEF964X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace fuel injector.

16 CHECK THROTTLE POSTION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-18
3. Check the following
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
I Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
I Then reconnect joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to to power in harness or connectors.

17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-200
 EXIT
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Description

Description NHEC0081
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0115, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0115. Refer to EC-184. GI

MA

EM

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0081S01 LC

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor
which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical
resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. FE

AT
SEF594K

<Reference data> AX
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F) SU
−10 (14) 4.4 9.2

20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 BR

50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00

90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 ST

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 70
SEF012P (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 48 (ECM ground).
RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0082
Malfunction is detected when voltage sent to ECM from the sen-
sor is not practical, even when some time has passed after start- BT
ing the engine, or engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0431
I Harness or connectors IDX
(High resistance in the circuit)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Thermostat

EC-201
 EXIT
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0083

CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0083S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
PEF779U 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-204.
WITH GST NHEC0083S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-202
 EXIT
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0084

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC802C

EC-203
 EXIT
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0085

1 CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

SEF259X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF303X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

2 CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-204
 EXIT
DTC P0125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECTS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT
SEF304X

OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SU
5 CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
BR
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant
does not flow.
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to LC-14, “Thermostat”. RS

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-205
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0086

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0087
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SEN-B2
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR-B2
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0089

Under the condition in which the front heated oxygen sensor sig-
nal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
Malfunction is detected when the voltage from the sensor is con-
stantly approx. 0.3V.

SEF237U

Possible Cause NHEC0432

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Front heated oxygen sensor

EC-206
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0090

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: GI
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
EM
SEF008X
WITH CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
NHEC0090S01
LC
2) Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2) P0130 (P0150)” of “FRONT O2
SENSOR” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3) Touch “START”.
4) Let it idle for at least 3 minutes. FE
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4. AT
SEF009X 5) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions AX
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,400 - 2,400 rpm SU
Vehicle speed 70 - 120 km/h (43 - 75 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 10 msec

BR
Selector lever Suitable position
ST
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
PEF210V step 2.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RS
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-211.
During this test, P1148 and P1168 may be stored in ECM. BT

HA

SC

EL
Overall Function Check NHEC0091
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated IDX
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0091S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank
front HO2S signal) or 62 (Lleft bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
SEF308X

EC-207
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-211.

EC-208
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0092

RIGHT BANK NHEC0092S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC805C
EL

IDX

SEF653X

EC-209
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0092S02

MEC804C

SEF654X

EC-210
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0093

1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF255X
3. Make sure front HO2S harness protector color, and disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness con-
nector.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF194WO
BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF902X
HA
© GO TO 2.

SC

EL

IDX

EC-211
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK FRONT HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0332
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or front HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0333
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 4.
II)
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-212
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

SEF072X FE
6. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF702W
ST
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
RS

BT

HA

SC

PEF736W
CAUTION:
EL
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-213
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

SEF967X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WO
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

EC-214
 EXIT
DTC P0130 (RIGHT, -B1), P0150 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FRONT HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. Check the following. GI
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) MA
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18. EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. LC
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
FE
© INSPECTION END

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-215
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0094

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0095
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SEN-B2
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR-B2
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0097

To judge the malfunction, the output from the front heated oxygen
sensor is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is suf-
ficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When
both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will
be detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltage
from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.

SEF300U

Possible Cause NHEC0433

I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Front heated oxygen sensor heater
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks

EC-216
DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0098

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: GI
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
EM
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
LC

FE

AT

WITH CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0098S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds. SU
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)
P0131 (P0151)” of “FRONT O2 SENSOR” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. BR
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
ST
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
SEF014X
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
RS
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It BT
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
HA
Vehicle speed 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec

SC
Selector lever Suitable position
SEF015X
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from EL
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic IDX
Procedure”, EC-218.

PEF211V

EC-217
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check

Overall Function Check NHEC0099

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0099S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank
front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
SEF308X 3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-218.

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0100

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 2.

2 RETIGHTEN FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Loosen and retighten corresponding front heated oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)

© GO TO 3.

EC-218
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

MA

EM

LC

SEF017X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? FE
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. AX
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82. SU
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? BR
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
ST
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-305.
No © GO TO 4.
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-219
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

1. Stop engine.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WA
3. Disconnect front HO2S harness connector.
4. Check resistance between front HO2S terminals as follows.

SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II)
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-220
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

SEF072X FE
6. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF702W
ST
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
RS

BT

HA

SC

PEF736W
CAUTION:
EL
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-221
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

SEF967X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WA
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

EC-222
 DTC P0131 (RIGHT, -B1), P0151 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (LEAN SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK FRONT HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
3. For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0150 (LEFT BANK, -B2) FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR GI
(FRONT HO2S) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-206.
4. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground MA
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist. EM
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
6. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT FE

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0150 (LEFT BANK, -B2) FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(FRONT HO2S) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-206. AT
© INSPECTION END
AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-223
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0101

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0102
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SEN-B2
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR-B2
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0104

To judge the malfunction, the output from the front heated oxygen
sensor is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is suf-
ficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum and minimum voltages
from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages.

SEF299U

Possible Cause NHEC0434

I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Front heated oxygen sensor heater

EC-224
DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0105

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: GI
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
EM
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
LC

FE

AT

WITH CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0105S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds. SU
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)
P0132 (P0152)” of “FRONT O2 SENSOR” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. BR
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
ST
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
SEF018X
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
RS
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It BT
will take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
CMPS·RPM (POS) 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
HA
Vehicle speed 80 - 100 km/h (50 - 62 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec

SC
Selector lever Suitable position
SEF019X
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from EL
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic IDX
Procedure”, EC-226.

PEF212V

EC-225
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check

Overall Function Check NHEC0106

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0106S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank
front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
SEF308X 3) Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000
rpm constant under no load.
I The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-226.

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0107

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 2.

2 RETIGHTEN FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Loosen and retighten corresponding front heated oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)

© GO TO 3.

EC-226
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

MA

EM

LC

SEF017X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? FE
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. AX
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82. SU
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BR
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
ST
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-313.
No © GO TO 4.
RS
4 CHECK FRONT HO2S CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
BT
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF194WD
3. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
4. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-227
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

Check resistance between front HO2S terminals as follows.

SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 7.
II)
NG © GO TO 8.

EC-228
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

SEF072X FE
6. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF702W
ST
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
RS

BT

HA

SC

PEF736W
CAUTION:
EL
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

EC-229
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

SEF967X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

8 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WD
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

EC-230
 DTC P0132 (RIGHT, -B1), P0152 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RICH SHIFT EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK FRONT HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0150 (LEFT BANK, -B2) FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR GI
(FRONT HO2S) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-206.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground MA
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist. EM
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT FE

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
For circuit, refer to “DTC P0130 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0150 (LEFT BANK, -B2) FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(FRONT HO2S) (CIRCUIT)”, EC-206. AT
© INSPECTION END
AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-231
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0108

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R

SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0109
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
FR O2 SEN-B2
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
Changes more than 5 times during
FR O2 MNTR-B2
10 seconds.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0111

To judge the malfunction of front heated oxygen sensor, this diag-
nosis measures response time of front heated oxygen sensor sig-
nal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and
load), fuel feedback control constant, and front heated oxygen sen-
sor temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compen-
sated time (front heated oxygen sensor cycling time index) is inor-
dinately long or not.
Malfunction is detected when the response of the voltage signal
from the sensor takes more than the specified time.
SEF010V

Possible Cause NHEC0435

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Front heated oxygen sensor heater
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
I Exhaust gas leaks
I PCV valve

EC-232
DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I Mass air flow sensor

GI

MA

EM

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0112

LC
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. FE
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). AT
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0112S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds. SU
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)
P0133 (P0153)” of “FRONT O2 SENSOR” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. BR
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
ST
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
SEF021X
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
RS
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It BT
will take approximately 40 to 50 seconds.)
CMPS·RPM (POS) 1,200 - 2,800 rpm
HA
Vehicle speed 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 3 - 9 msec

SC
Selector lever Suitable position
SEF022X
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from EL
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic IDX
Procedure”, EC-237.

PEF213V

EC-233
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check

Overall Function Check NHEC0113

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0113S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank
front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
SEF308X 3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V →
0 - 0.3V
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-237.

EC-234
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0114

RIGHT BANK NHEC0114S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC805C
EL

IDX

SEF653X

EC-235
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0114S02

MEC804C

SEF654X

EC-236
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0115

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF255X

© GO TO 2. FE

2 RETIGHTEN FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR AT

Loosen and retighten corresponding front heated oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) AX

© GO TO 3.
SU
3 CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
BR
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
ST

RS

BT

HA
SEF099P

OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace. EL

4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK IDX

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace.

EC-237
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

SEF017X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82.
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-305,
313.
No © GO TO 6.

EC-238
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FRONT HO2S HARNESS PROTECTOR COLOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF194WF
3. Disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

FE

AT

AX

SEF902X SU

© GO TO 7. BR

7 CHECK FRONT HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
ST
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. RS

BT

MTBL0334 HA
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or FRONT HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. SC

EL

MTBL0335
IDX
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-239
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

Check resistance between front HO2S terminals as follows.

SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 13.

9 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.

SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.

EC-240
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK PCV VALVE

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove PCV valve ventilation hose from PCV valve. GI
4. Make sure that a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately
when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
MA

EM

LC

SEC137A

OK or NG
FE
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 12. AT
II)
NG © Replace PCV valve. AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-241
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

SEF072X
6. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below.

SEF702W
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

PEF736W
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.

EC-242
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and GI
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA

EM

LC

SEF967X
CAUTION: FE
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13. AX

13 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SU

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
BR

ST

RS

BT

SEF194WF
HA
© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

SC
14 CHECK FRONT HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18. EL
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 or 2 and ground
I Joint connector IDX
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17 or joint connector-18.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-243
 DTC P0133 (RIGHT, -B1), P0153 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-244
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0116

The front heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The front heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end tube GI
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The front heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM. The MA
ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-
fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change
from 1V to 0V. EM
SEF463R

LC

FE

AT
SEF288D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AX

Mode NHEC0117
Specification data are reference values. SU
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

FR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
BR
FR O2 SEN-B2
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
I Engine: After warming up LEAN +, RICH
FR O2 MNTR-B1 rpm
Changes more than 5 times during
ST
FR O2 MNTR-B2
10 seconds.

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0119
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the front
heated oxygen sensor output is not inordinately high. BT
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
HA

SC

SEF301U
EL
Possible Cause NHEC0436
I Harness or connectors IDX
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Front heated oxygen sensor

EC-245
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0120

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0120S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
PEF361V 4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-249.
WITH GST NHEC0120S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.
6) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
7) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-249.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.

EC-246
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0121

RIGHT BANK NHEC0121S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC805C
EL

IDX

SEF653X

EC-247
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0121S02

MEC804C

SEF654X

EC-248
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0122

1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF194WB
3. Disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF902X

BR
© GO TO 2.

ST
2 RETIGHTEN FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Loosen and retighten corresponding front heated oxygen sensor.
Tightening torque: RS
40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)

BT
© GO TO 3.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-249
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK FRONT HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0336
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or front HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0337
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK FRONT HO2S CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Disconnect front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II)
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-250
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

SEF072X FE
6. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left: AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF702W
ST
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
RS

BT

HA

SC

PEF736W
CAUTION:
EL
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-251
 EXIT
DTC P0134 (RIGHT, -B1), P0154 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (Left bank front HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

SEF967X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WB
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-252
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Description

Description NHEC0123
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0123S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
tion
Actuator GI
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Front heated
Engine speed
oxygen sen- Front heated oxygen sensor MA
sor heater heaters
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) control
EM
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the front heated oxygen sensor heaters corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION LC
NHEC0123S02

Engine speed rpm Front heated oxygen sensor heaters

Above 3,600 OFF

Below 3,600 ON
FE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode NHEC0124
AT
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION AX
FR O2 HTR-B1 I Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
FR O2 HTR-B2 I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF SU

BR

ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0126
Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the front
heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is out of the normal range. BT
(An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the front
heated oxygen sensor heater.)
HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0437
I Harness or connectors IDX
(The front heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Front heated oxygen sensor heater

EC-253
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0127

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0127S01

PEF357V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-257.
WITH GST NHEC0127S02
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
4) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-257.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.

EC-254
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0128

RIGHT BANK NHEC0128S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC807C
EL

IDX

SEF655X

EC-255
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0128S02

MEC806C

SEF656X

EC-256
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0129

1 CHECK FRONT HO2S POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF194WC
3. Disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF902X
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. BR
5. Check voltage between front HO2S terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

ST

RS

BT

SEF311X
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SC
NG © GO TO 2.
EL
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. IDX
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between front heated oxygen sensor and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

EC-257
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK FRONT HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0338
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER

Check resistance between front HO2S terminals as follows.

SEF310X
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-258
 EXIT
DTC P0135 (RIGHT, -B1), P0155 (LEFT, -B2) FRONT HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF194WC
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
FE
© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.
AT
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. AX
© INSPECTION END

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-259
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0130

The rear heated oxygen sensor, after three way catalyst, monitors
the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
SEF327R
for engine control operation.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0131
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

RR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
RR O2 SEN-B2 Revving engine from idle up to
I Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR-B1 2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
RR O2 MNTR-B2

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0133

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of
sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the minimum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
SEF304U

Possible Cause NHEC0438

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Rear heated oxygen sensor
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors

EC-260
DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0134

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. MA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0134S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EM
SEF682X 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. LC
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2) P0137 (P0157)” of “REAR O2
SENSOR” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II. FE
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. AT
SEF683X
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-265.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing. AX
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
SU
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine. BR
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
ST
SEF684X
RS
Overall Function Check NHEC0135
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not BT
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0135S01 HA
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. SC
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank
rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
SEF312X
engine ground. EL
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. IDX
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.

EC-261
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
The voltage should be below 0.54V at least once during
this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-265.

EC-262
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0136

RIGHT BANK NHEC0136S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC728C
EL

IDX

SEF657X

EC-263
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0136S02

MEC727C

SEF658X

EC-264
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0137

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF255X

© GO TO 2. FE

2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. AX
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF072X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BT
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. HA
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. SC
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82. EL
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? IDX
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-313.
No © GO TO 3.

EC-265
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WH
3. Disconnect corresponding rear heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

SEF467W
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0339
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or rear HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0340
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-266
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK REAR HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between rear HO2S terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. GI
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II) EM
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
LC
5 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” as the monitor item with CON- FE
SULT-II.
4. Check “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF645X
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. ST
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a RS
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
BT
NG © GO TO 8.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-267
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when rewing up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

SEF313X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-II

Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

8 REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Stop vehicle and turn ignitioin switch OFF.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WH
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning rear heated oxygen sensor.

EC-268
 DTC P0137 (RIGHT, -B1), P0157 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MIN. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK REAR HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following. GI
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) MA
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17. EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. LC
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
FE
© INSPECTION END

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-269
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0138

The rear heated oxygen sensor, after three way catalyst, monitors
the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
SEF327R
for engine control operation.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0139
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

RR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
RR O2 SEN-B2 Revving engine from idle up to
I Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR-B1 2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
RR O2 MNTR-B2

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0141

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when the maximum voltage from the sen-
sor is not reached to the specified voltage.
SEF303U

Possible Cause NHEC0439

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Rear heated oxygen sensor
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks

EC-270
DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0142

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. MA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0142S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EM
SEF685X 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. LC
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2) P0138 (P0158)” of “REAR O2
SENSOR” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II. FE
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. AT
SEF686X
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing. AX
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
SU
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine. BR
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
ST
SEF687X
RS
Overall Function Check NHEC0143
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not BT
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0143S01 HA
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. SC
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank
rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
SEF312X
engine ground. EL
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. IDX
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.

EC-271
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
The voltage should be above 0.56V at least once during
this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-275.

EC-272
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0144

RIGHT BANK NHEC0144S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC728C
EL

IDX

SEF657X

EC-273
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0144S02

MEC727C

SEF658X

EC-274
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0145

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF255X

© GO TO 2. FE

2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. AX
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF072X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? BT
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. HA
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. SC
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82. EL
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? IDX
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-305.
No © GO TO 3.

EC-275
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WI
3. Disconnect corresponding rear heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

SEF467W
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0341
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or rear HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0342
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-276
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK REAR HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between rear HO2S terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. GI
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II) EM
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
LC
5 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” as the monitor item with CON- FE
SULT-II.
4. Check “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF645X
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. ST
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a RS
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
BT
NG © GO TO 8.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-277
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-I

Without CONSULT
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

SEF313X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-II

Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

8 REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WI
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning rear heated oxygen sensor.

EC-278
 DTC P0138 (RIGHT, -B1), P0158 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (MAX. VOLTAGE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK REAR HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following. GI
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) MA
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17. EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. LC
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
FE
© INSPECTION END

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-279
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0146

The rear heated oxygen sensor, after three way catalyst, monitors
the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
SEF327R
for engine control operation.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0147
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

RR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
RR O2 SEN-B2 Revving engine from idle up to
I Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR-B1 2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
RR O2 MNTR-B2

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0149

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the switching response of
the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when it takes more time for the sensor to
respond between rich and lean than the specified time.
SEF302U

Possible Cause NHEC0440

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Rear heated oxygen sensor
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks

EC-280
DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0150

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. MA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0150S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EM
SEF688X 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. LC
5) Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
6) Select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2) P0139 (P0159)” of “REAR O2
SENSOR” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II. FE
7) Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-II.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. AT
SEF689X
If NG is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-285.
If “CANNOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing. AX
a) Stop engine and cool down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates
less than 70°C (158°F).
SU
b) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
c) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
d) Start engine. BR
e) Return to step 6 again when the “COOLAN TEMP/S” reaches
to 70°C (158°F).
ST
SEF690X
RS
Overall Function Check NHEC0151
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not BT
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0151S01 HA
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. SC
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank
rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
SEF312X
engine ground. EL
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. IDX
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is not
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
in “D” position with “OD” OFF.

EC-281
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
The voltage should change at more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
6) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-285.

EC-282
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0152

RIGHT BANK NHEC0152S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC728C
EL

IDX

SEF657X

EC-283
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0152S02

MEC727C

SEF658X

EC-284
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0153

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF255X

© GO TO 2. FE

2 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA AT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARN CONTROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. AX
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF072X
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BT
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. HA
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. SC
5. Make sure 1st trip DTC No. 0100 is displayed.
6. Erase the 1st trip DTC memory. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
EC-82. EL
7. Make sure DTC No. 0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? IDX
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes © Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-305,
313.
No © GO TO 3.

EC-285
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WK
3. Disconnect corresponding rear heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

SEF467W
4. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0343
Continuity should exist.
6. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or rear HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0344
Continuity should not exist.
7. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-286
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK REAR HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between rear HO2S terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. GI
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II) EM
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors
LC
5 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” as the monitor item with CON- FE
SULT-II.
4. Check “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF645X
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. ST
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a RS
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
BT
NG © GO TO 8.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-287
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

SEF313X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-II

Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

8 REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WK
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning rear heated oxygen sensor.

EC-288
 DTC P0139 (RIGHT, -B1), P0159 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (RESPONSE EXIT
MONITORING)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK REAR HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following. GI
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) MA
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17. EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. LC
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
FE
© INSPECTION END

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-289
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0154

The rear heated oxygen sensor, after three way catalyst, monitors
the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the front heated oxygen sensor
are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the
signal from the rear heated oxygen sensor.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the rear heated oxygen sensor is not used
SEF327R
for engine control operation.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0155
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

RR O2 SEN-B1
0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
RR O2 SEN-B2 Revving engine from idle up to
I Engine: After warming up
RR O2 MNTR-B1 2,000 rpm
LEAN +, RICH
RR O2 MNTR-B2

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0157

The rear heated oxygen sensor has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the front heated oxygen sensor. The
oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of rear heated
oxygen sensor, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually
high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.

SEF305U

Possible Cause NHEC0441

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Rear heated oxygen sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0158

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0158S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
SEF136X
with CONSULT-II.

EC-290
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
2) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle with engine running.
4) Let engine idle for 1 minute.
GI
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,300 - 3,100 rpm
MA
VHCL SPEED SE 64 - 130 km/h (40 - 81 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 0.5 - 6.4 msec

EM
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
LC
Selector lever Suitable position

6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,

EC-294.

FE

AT

Overall Function Check AX

NHEC0159
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the rear heated
oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not SU
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1)
NHEC0159S01
Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h BR
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. ST
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank
SEF312X rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
engine ground. RS
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) BT
The voltage should be below 2V during this procedure.
5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-294.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-291
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0160

RIGHT BANK NHEC0160S01

MEC728C

SEF657X

EC-292
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0160S02

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC727C

EL

IDX

SEF658X

EC-293
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0161

1 INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X
3. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WL
4. Disconnect corresponding rear heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

SEF467W
5. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
© GO TO 2.

EC-294
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK REAR HO2S INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
GI

MA

MTBL0345
Continuity should exist. EM
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or rear HO2S terminal and ground as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
LC

MTBL0346 FE
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AX

3 CHECK REAR HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT SU

1. Check harness continuity between rear HO2S terminal 4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. BR
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
4 CHECK REAR HO2S CONNECTORS FOR WATER
BT
Check rear heated oxygen sensor connector and harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG HA
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6. SC
II)
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EL

IDX

EC-295
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” as the monitor item with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Check “RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.

SEF645X
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be above 0.56V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“RR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” should be below 0.54V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

6 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-I

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Stop vehicle with engine running.
3. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 72 (Right bank rear HO2S signal) or 71 (Left bank rear HO2S signal) and
engine ground.
4. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

SEF313X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-296
 EXIT
DTC P0140 (RIGHT, -B1), P0160 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S (HIGH VOLTAGE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR-II

Idle vehicle for 10 minutes, then check voltage between the same terminals as in Test No. 6; or check voltage when coast-
ing from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should go below 0.54V at least once during this procedure. GI
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. EM
NG © GO TO 8.

LC
8 REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
1. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF194WL
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool BR
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

© Replace malfunctioning rear heated oxygen sensor. ST

9 CHECK REAR HO2S SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT RS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect joint connector-17.
3. Check the following. BT
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.) HA
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-17. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. EL
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

IDX
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-297
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Description

Description NHEC0162
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0162S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Rear heated

oxygen sen- Rear heated oxygen sensor
Engine speed
sor heater heaters
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) control

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the rear heated oxygen sensor heaters corresponding to the engine
speed.
OPERATION NHEC0162S02

Engine speed rpm Rear heated oxygen sensor heaters

Above 3,600 OFF

Below 3,600 ON

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0163
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

OFF
RR O2 HTR-B1 I Engine is running above 3,600 rpm.
RR O2 HTR-B2 I Engine is running below 3,600 rpm after driving for 2 minutes at a
ON
speed of 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0165

Malfunction is detected when the current amperage in the rear
heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM through the rear
heated oxygen sensor heater.)

Possible Cause NHEC0442

I Harness or connectors
(The rear heated oxygen sensor heater circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Rear heated oxygen sensor heater

EC-298
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0166

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- MA
tery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0166S01 EM
PEF357V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine. LC
3) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
4) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-302. FE
WITH GST NHEC0166S02
1) Start engine.
AT
2) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2
consecutive minutes.
3) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds. AX
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
5) Start engine.
6) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 SU
consecutive minutes.
7) Stop vehicle and let engine idle for at least 6 seconds. BR
8) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
9) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-302.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should ST
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is RS
recommended.
BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-299
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0167

RIGHT BANK NHEC0167S01

MEC731C

SEF659X

EC-300
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0167S02

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC730C

EL

IDX

SEF660X

EC-301
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0168

1 CHECK REAR HO2S POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.

SEF194WP
3. Disconnect corresponding rear heated oxygen sensor harness connector.

SEF467W
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between rear HO2S terminal 3 and ground.

SEF314X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between rear heated oxygen sensor and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

EC-302
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR HO2S GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and rear HO2S terminal as follows. GI
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MA

EM
MTBL0347
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
FE
4 CHECK REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER
Check the resistance between rear HO2S terminals as follows. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF315X
CAUTION:
ST
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
BT
NG © GO TO 5.

5 REPLACE REAR HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

HA
Check rear heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
SC

EL

IDX

SEF194WP
CAUTION:
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
© Replace malfunctioning rear heated oxygen sensor.

EC-303
 EXIT
DTC P0141 (RIGHT, -B1), P0161 (LEFT, -B2) REAR HO2S HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-304
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0169

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the front heated GI
oxygen sensors. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large MA
(The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condi-
tion as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic). EM
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
LC
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injec-
Front heated oxygen sensors Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) tion control

Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not oper-

ate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0487
I Intake air leaks
I Front heated oxygen sensor SU
I Injectors
I Exhaust gas leaks
I Incorrect fuel pressure BR
I Lack of fuel
I Mass air flow sensor ST

RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0170
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, BT
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0170S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SC
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CON-
TROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
PEF717W
EL
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. IDX
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-309.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-309. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

EC-305
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST NHEC0170S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
SEF256X
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-309.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-309. If engine does
not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

EC-306
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0171

RIGHT BANK NHEC0171S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC810C

EC-307
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0171S02

MEC811C

EC-308
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0172

1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF099P

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.
AT
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SU
NG © Repair or replace.
BR
3 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. ST
2. Disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows. RS
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

BT

HA
MTBL0348
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or front HO2S terminal and ground as follows. SC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

EL

IDX
MTBL0349
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-309
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-537, 674.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-52.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
© Repair or replace.

6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm

With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-165.

EC-310
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. GI

MA

EM

LC

PEF389V
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. FE
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.

AT

AX

SU

BR
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
RS
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-664.

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-311
 DTC P0171 (RIGHT, -B1), P0174 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (LEAN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors on left bank (for DTC P0171), right bank (for DTC P0174).
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EC-53.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors on right bank (for DTC P0171), left bank (for DTC P0174) should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.

SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-312
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0173

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual
mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio
based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the front heated GI
oxygen sensors. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation
to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large MA
(The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condi-
tion as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL
(2 trip detection logic). EM
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
LC
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injec-
Front heated oxygen sensors Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) tion control

Malfunction is detected when fuel injection system does not oper-

ate properly, the amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.) FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0488
I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Injectors SU
I Exhaust gas leaks
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I Mass air flow sensor BR

ST

RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0174
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, BT
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0174S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SC
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN CON-
TROL” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
PEF717W
EL
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. IDX
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-317.
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction, too.
8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-317. If
engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.
EC-313
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST NHEC0174S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC P0100 is
detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC P0100.
SEF256X
7) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-317.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection sys-
tem has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-317. If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visu-
ally.

EC-314
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0175

RIGHT BANK NHEC0175S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC810C

EC-315
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
LEFT BANK NHEC0175S02

MEC811C

EC-316
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0176

1 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF099P

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.
AT
2 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SU
NG © Repair or replace.
BR
3 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. ST
2. Disconnect corresponding front heated oxygen sensor harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and front HO2S terminal as follows. RS
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

BT

HA
MTBL0350
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal or front HO2S terminal and ground as follows. SC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

EL

IDX
MTBL0351
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-317
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51.
At idling:
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is connected.
235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
When fuel pressure regulator valve vacuum hose is disconnected.
294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-537, 674.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-52.)
© Repair or replace.

6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm

With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-165.

EC-318
 DTC P0172 (RIGHT, -B1), P0175 (LEFT, -B2) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM EXIT
FUNCTION (RICH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. GI

MA

EM

LC

PEF389V
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. FE
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.

AT

AX

SU

BR
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
RS
NG © Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-665.

BT
8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EC-53.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. HA
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors left bank (for DTC P0172), right bank (for P0175).
The injector harness connectors on right bank (for P0172), left bank (for P0175) should remain connected. SC
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. EL
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
IDX
OK (Does not drip.) © GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.) © Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-319
 EXIT
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0177

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF263X

<Reference data>
Fuel temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)

20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7

50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 92
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 48 (ECM ground).

SEF012P

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0178

Malfunction is detected when an excessively high or low voltage is
sent to ECM, rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared
with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.

Possible Cause NHEC0489

I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel tank temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0179

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

EC-320
 EXIT
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0179S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 10 seconds. GI
If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-323.
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. MA
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the follow- EM
PEF609W ing step.
5) Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F). LC
6) Wait at least 10 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-323.

FE

AT

WITH GST AX
NHEC0179S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-321
 EXIT
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0180

MEC735C

EC-322
 EXIT
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0181

1 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF263X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF586X
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART RS

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6 BT
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
© Repair harness or connector. HA

3 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT SC
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram. EL
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-323
 EXIT
DTC P0180 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.

SEF587X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-324
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
System Description

System Description NHEC0608

COOLING FAN CONTROL NHEC0608S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
tion
Actuator GI
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

MA
Cooling fan
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal Cooling fan relay(s)
control
EM
Ignition switch Start signal

Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

LC
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION NHEC0608S02

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF578XA

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor BT

Mode NHEC0609
Specification data are reference values. HA
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF SC

I Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates) EL
Engine coolant temperature is
OFF
94°C (201°F) or less
IDX
I After warming up engine, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine. between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW
I Air conditioner switch: OFF (219°F)

Engine coolant temperature is

HIGH
105°C (221°F) or more

EC-325
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0610

This diagnosis checks whether the engine coolant temperature is
extraordinary high, even when the load is not heavy.
When malfunction is detected, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
will light up even in the first trip.
Malfunction is detected when engine coolant temperature is exces-
sively high under normal engine speed.

Possible Cause NHEC0611

I Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
I Cooling fan
I Thermostat
I Improper ignition timing
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Blocked radiator
I Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is collided but not
repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation of front fog lamp
or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-342.

Overall Function Check NHEC0612

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the coolant
overtemperature enrichment protection check, a DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high-pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap
by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to
escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0612S01
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the
proper range, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Chang-
ing Engine Coolant”.
SEF621W a) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed

EC-326
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
b) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted. GI
c) After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
2) Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has MA
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. After
repair, go to the next step.
3) Start engine and let it idle. EM
4) Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28,
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step. LC
5) Perform “COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
a) Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 95°C (203°F) and make sure that
cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. FE
b) Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 105°C (221°F) and make sure that
cooling fan operates at high speed. If NG, go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-331. After repair, go to the next step. AT
6) Check for blocked coolant passage.
a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that cool- AX
ant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. After repair, go
to the next step. SU
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
BR
7) Check for blocked radiator air passage.
a) When market fog lamps have been installed, check for dam-
aged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator. ST
b) Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
c) Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radia-
tor grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front. RS
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
8) Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 7 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331.
BT
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
9) Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-111. HA
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.
WITH GST SC
NHEC0612S02
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator. EL
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir and/or radiator is below the IDX
proper range, and go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%,
replace the coolant in the following procedure MA-14, “Chang-
ing Engine Coolant”.
a) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed
of 2 liters per minute like pouring coolant from a kettle. Be sure
to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12,
“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.

EC-327
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
b) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow
noise is emitted.
c) After checking or replacing coolant, go to step 3 below.
2) Ask the customer if engine coolant has been added. If it has
been added, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. After
repair, go to the next step.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Make sure that A/C switch is “OFF” and air conditioner is not
operating. If NG, check air conditioner circuit. Refer to HA-28,
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”. After repair, go to the next step.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”
6) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness con-
nector.
7) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor.
8) Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. After repair, go
to the next step.
9) Check for blocked coolant passage.
a) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature, then grasp
radiator upper hose and lower hose and make sure that cool-
ant flows.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331. After repair, go
to the next step.
Be extremely careful not to touch any moving or adjacent
parts.
10) Check for blocked radiator air passage.
a) When market fog lamps have been installed, check for dam-
aged fans and clogging in the condenser and radiator.
b) Check the front end for clogging caused by insects or debris.
c) Check for improper fitting of front-end cover, damaged radia-
tor grille or bumper, damaged vehicle front.
If NG, take appropriate action and then go to the next step.
11) Check function of ECT sensor.
Refer to step 6 of “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-331.
If NG, replace ECT sensor and go to the next step.
12) Check ignition timing. Refer to basic inspection, EC-111.
Make sure that ignition timing is 15°±2° at idle.
If NG, adjust ignition timing and then recheck.

EC-328
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0613

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC759C

EC-329
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

MEC879C

EC-330
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM
SEF630X

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0614

LC
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. FE
No © GO TO 4.

AT
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
AX

SU

BR

ST

AEC707
RS
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-337.)

EC-331
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEF111X
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-340.)

EC-332
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
GI

MA

EM

LC
AEC707
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. FE

AT

AX

SU

SEC163BA
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-337.)
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-333
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
5. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
7. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.

MEF613EA

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-340.)

6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.

SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-10, “Water Pump”.)
© Repair or replace.

EC-334
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. FE
NG © Replace radiator cap.
AT
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat. AX
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. SU

BR

ST

RS

SLC343 BT
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: HA
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-14, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace thermostat EL

IDX

EC-335
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

SEF304X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-342.
© INSPECTION END

EC-336
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE A =NHEC0614S01

1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. GI
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA

EM

LC

SEF590X

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2. AT

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART AX

Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
SU
I 15A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse BR
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-337
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.

SEF304V
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-2 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-338
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF591X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relay.
FE
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF592X ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. RS
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.

BT
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
HA
© INSPECTION END

SC

EL

IDX

EC-339
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B =NHEC0614S02

1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF593X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
© Repair harness or connectors.

3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-340
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. EM

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART LC

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Joint connector-10
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. FE

6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

AT
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF591X

OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relays.
BT
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF592X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.

EC-341
 EXIT
DTC P0217 COOLANT OVERTEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT PROTECTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating NHEC0615

Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —

I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper

2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.

3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See MA-14, “Changing

in reservoir tank and Engine Coolant”.
radiator filler neck

4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See LC-9, “System

(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 Check”.
psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-9, “System

Check”.

ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-14, “Thermostat”
lower radiator hoses hot and LC-16, “Radiator”.

ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P0217 (EC-325).

OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi- Negative —

cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer

ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving

I Coolant overflow to I Visual No overflow during driv- See MA-14, “Changing

reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant”.

OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See MA-13, “ENGINE
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank MAINTENANCE”.
tor

OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-42, “Inspection”.
gauge mum distortion (warping)

12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-61, “Inspection”.
tons walls or piston

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.

*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-21, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.

EC-342
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0182

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine
speed fluctuates enough to cause the CKP sensor signal to vary,
ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. GI
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire MA

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) EM
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can dam-
age the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL
will blink. LC
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP
sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC
on a second trip, the MIL will blink. FE
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not
damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, AT
the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will
AX
affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the mis-
fire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM SU
monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolu-
tions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or BR
on multiple cylinders.
Malfunction is detected when multiple cylinders misfire, No. 1 cyl-
inder misfires, No. 2 cylinder misfires, No. 3 cylinder misfires, No. ST
4 cylinder misfires, No. 5 cylinder misfires and No. 6 cylinder
misfires.
RS
Possible Cause NHEC0490
I Improper spark plug
I Insufficient compression BT
I Incorrect fuel pressure
I EGR volume control valve HA
I The injector circuit is open or shorted
I Injectors
I Intake air leak SC
I The ignition secondary circuit is open or shorted
I Lack of fuel EL
I Drive plate or flywheel
I Front heated oxygen sensor
IDX

EC-343
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0183

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0183S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
PEF869U
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-344.
WITH GST NHEC0183S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0184

1 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Discover air leak location and repair.

2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

1. Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace it.

3 CHECK EGR FUNCTION

Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure” of “DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)”. Refer to EC-579.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair EGR system.

EC-344
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
GI

MA

EM

LC
PEF389V
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a
momentary engine speed drop? FE

AT

AX

SU

SEF281X
BR
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5. ST
No © GO TO 8.
RS
5 CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? BT

HA

SC

EL

MEC703B IDX
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-664.

EC-345
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK

1. Disconnect ignition wire from spark plug.
2. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition wire.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.

SEF575Q

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to “DTC P1320 IGNITION
SIGNAL”, EC-544.

7 CHECK SPARK PLUGS

Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.

SEF156I

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to
MA-13, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”.

8 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-12, “Measurement of Compression Pressure”.
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

EC-346
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51. GI
At idle:
Approx. 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10. EM

10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART LC

Check the following.
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-537, 674.)
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-52.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA-16, “Checking Fuel Lines”.)
I Fuel filter for clogging
FE
© Repair or replace.

11 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

AT
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.
AX

SU

BR
MTBL0382

OK or NG ST
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 13. RS
II)
NG © Follow the “Basic Inspection”.
BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-347
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH/RH

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)”
and “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
4. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.

PEF365V
5. Check the following.
I “FR O2 MNTR-B1 (-B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown left:

SEF702W
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

PEF736W
CAUTION:
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.

EC-348
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

13 CHECK FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR LH/RH

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (right bank front HO2S signal) or 62 (left bank front HO2S signal) and GI
engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MA

EM

LC

SEF967X
CAUTION: FE
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14. AX

14 REPLACE FRONT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SU

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check front heated oxygen sensor harness protector color.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF194WM
HA
© Replace malfunctioning front heated oxygen sensor.

SC

EL

IDX

EC-349
 DTC P0300 - P0306 NO. 6 - 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE, MULTIPLE CYLINDER EXIT
MISFIRE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm

With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-165.

16 CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in “Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-135.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Repair or replace.

17 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-82.
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
© GO TO 18.

18 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-350
 EXIT
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0185

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This GI
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. MA
The knock sensor has one trip detection logic.

EM
SEF332I

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0187

LC
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage
from the knock sensor is sent to ECM.

FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0491
I Harness or connectors
(The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.) SU
I Knock sensor

BR

ST

RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0188
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, BT
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: HA
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
SC
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0188S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
PEF357V
with CONSULT-II. EL
2) Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-353. IDX

EC-351
 EXIT
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0189

MEC736C

SEF663X

EC-352
 EXIT
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0190

1 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
GI
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 93 and engine ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. MA

EM

LC

SEF321X FE
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 2.
AX
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
SU
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
ST
NG © GO TO 3.
RS
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. BT
I Harness connector F8, F131
I Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-353
 EXIT
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.

SEF322X
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace knock sensor.

5 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

Loose and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 6.

6 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect harness connectors F8, F131.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F8 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F8, F131
I Joint connectors-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F8 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-354
 EXIT
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-355
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0191

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal).
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
SEF254P
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal).

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0492
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Tachometer: Connect
Almost the same speed as the
CKPS·RPM (POS) I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
value.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0193

Malfunction is detected when 1° signal is not entered to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking, or 1° signal is not
entered to ECM during engine running.

Possible Cause NHEC0493

I Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery

EC-356
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0194

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- MA
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0194S01 EM
PEF357V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine for at least two seconds. LC
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-359.

FE

AT

WITH GST AX
NHEC0194S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-357
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0195

MEC812C

EC-358
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF664X

FE

AT

Diagnostic Procedure AX
NHEC0196

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SU
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF255X

HA
© GO TO 2.

SC

EL

IDX

EC-359
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.

SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-360
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM

6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT LC

1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.

FE

AT

AX
SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows. SU

BR

MTBL0352 ST
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BT

7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION HA

Check that CKPS (POS) and front HO2S (Left bank) harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.
SC

EL

IDX

SEM222F

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Install CKPS (POS) correctly.

EC-361
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

SEF587P

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II

1. Reconnect disconnected harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriv-
ers.

SEF324X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

10 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

EC-362
 EXIT
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Joint connector-18 GI
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MA
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
EM
© INSPECTION END
LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-363
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0197

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine
front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No.
signal.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is
SEF252P
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No.
signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0199

Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the
first few seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) the cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during
engine running,
(Malfunction C) the cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern
during engine running.

Possible Cause NHEC0494

I Harness or connectors
[The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is open or
shorted.]
I Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0200

NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.

EC-364
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0200S01
With CONSULT-II NHEC0200S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-367. MA
With GST NHEC0200S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EM
PEF002P

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C NHEC0200S02 LC

With CONSULT-II NHEC0200S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, FE
EC-367.
With GST NHEC0200S0202 AT
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF357V

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-365
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0201

MEC738C

EC-366
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF665X

FE

AT

Diagnostic Procedure AX
NHEC0202

1 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
SU
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
BR
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
ST
No © Check starting system. (Refer to SC-6, “STARTING SYSTEM”.)

2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

RS
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. BT

HA

SC

EL

SEF255X IDX
© GO TO 3.

EC-367
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and CMPS (PHASE) harness connector.

SEF274P
3. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminals 66, 76. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between CMPS (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

5 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
2. Remove the CMPS (PHASE).
3. Visually check the CMPS (PHASE) for chipping.

SEF583P

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

EC-368
 EXIT
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMPS) (PHASE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II

Check resistance between CMPS (PHASE) terminals 1 and 2 as shown below.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF325X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
FE
7 CHECK CMPS (PHASE) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. AT
2. Disconnect joint connector-18.
3. Check the following.
I Continuity between joint connector terminal 1 and ground AX
I Joint connector
(Refer to EL-461, “HARNESS LAYOUT”.)
Continuity should exist. SU
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Then reconnect joint connector-18.
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
ST

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT RS

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-369
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Description

Description NHEC0203
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0203S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

EGR vol-
Battery Battery voltage EGR volume control valve
ume control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal

Electrical load Electrical load signal

PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal

TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal

This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold
to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the
EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A
built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum
engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined
by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control
valve remains close under the following conditions.
I Engine stopped
I Engine starting
I Engine idling
I Low engine coolant temperature
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature
I High engine speed
I Wide open throttle
I Low battery voltage

SEF551W

EC-370
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0203S02
EGR volume control valve NHEC0203S0203
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding GI
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the
ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each
time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing MA
the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM
does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued
so that the valve remains at that particular opening. EM
SEF552W

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor LC

Mode NHEC0495
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

FE
I Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
10 - 55 step
AT
I No-load quickly

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0204
If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sen-
sor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction SU
is diagnosed.
Malfunction is detected when no EGR flow is detected under con-
dition that calls for EGR. BR

ST
SEF073P
RS
Possible Cause NHEC0496
I Harness or connectors
(EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) BT
I EGR volume control valve stuck closed
I Dead (Weak) battery
HA
I EGR passage clogged
I EGR temperature sensor and circuit
I Exhaust gas leaks SC

EL

IDX

EC-371
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0205

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II even though DTC work support test result is
NG.
PEF603W
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine
immediately.
I For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C
(41°F) or higher.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0205S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”
3) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
PEF604W
CONSULT-II.
Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is within the range listed
below.
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to
lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means
other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate
diagnostic result.
4) Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S”
value. When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 60°C
(140°F), immediately go to the next step.
PEF785U
5) Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Touch “START”.
7) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and
then stop vehicle with engine running.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
9.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go
to the following step.
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 30 seconds or more.)
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,200 - 2,400 rpm

Vehicle speed Suitable speed

B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4 msec

THRTL POS SEN 0.65 - 1.08V

Selector lever Suitable position

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from

step 2.
9) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG

EC-372
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-375.

GI

MA

EM

WITH GST NHEC0205S02 LC

1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Check engine coolant temperature in MODE 1 with GST.
Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to FE
lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than
ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic
result. AT
SEF326X 4) Start engine and let it idle monitoring the value of “COOLAN
TEMP/S”. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 60°C AX
(140°F), immediately go to the next step.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.
Engine speed: 1,200 - 2,400 rpm SU
Vehicle speed: Suitable speed
Voltage between ECM terminal 91 and ground: 0.65 - 1.08V
Selector lever: Suitable position BR
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds, then
turn “ON”. ST
8) Repeat step 3 to 5.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST. RS
10) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-375.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II BT
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended. HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-373
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0207

MEC813C

SEF666X

EC-374
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0208

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

1. Start engine.
2. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF099P

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace exhaust system.
AT
2 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect EGR volume control vale harness connector. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF265X RS
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF327X

OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-375
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness connectors F4, F71
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve
© Repair harness or connectors.

4 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0356
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F4, F71
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR volume control valve
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6 CHECK EGR PASSAGE

Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace EGR passage.

7 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT

Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-570.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor.

EC-376
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I

Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF588X

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 10.
II) FE
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.
AT
9 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II
With CONSULT-II AX
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SU
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening
steps.
BR

ST

RS

BT

SEF328X
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
SC
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

EL

IDX

EC-377
 EXIT
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”.
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position.

SEF560W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-378
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Description

Description NHEC0497
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0497S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
tion
Actuator GI
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

MA
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal

LC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
EGR vol-
Battery Battery voltage EGR volume control valve
ume control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

FE
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal

Electrical load Electrical load signal AT

PNP switch Park/Neutral position signal

TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal AX

This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold
to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the SU
EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A
built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum BR
engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined
by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control
valve remains close under the following conditions. ST
I Engine stopped
I Engine starting
RS
I Engine idling
I Low engine coolant temperature
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature BT
I High engine speed
I Wide open throttle
HA
I Low battery voltage

SC

EL

IDX

SEF551W

EC-379
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0497S02
EGR volume control valve NHEC0497S0201
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the
ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each
time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing
the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM
does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued
so that the valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0498
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

I Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
10 - 55 step
I No-load quickly

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0499

Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve.
FAIL-SAFE MODE NHEC0499S02
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

EGR volume control valve cir-

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,800 rpm due to the fuel cut.
cuit

Possible Cause NHEC0500

I Harness or connectors
(EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EGR volume control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0501

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

PEF561W

EC-380
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0501S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. GI
3) Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 10 times.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-383. MA
WITH GST NHEC0501S02
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-381
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0502

MEC814C

SEF666X

EC-382
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0503

1 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF265X
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF327X

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
RS
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness connectors F4, F71 BT
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve
© Repair harness or connectors.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-383
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0356
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F4, F71
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR volume control valve
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I

Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.

SEF588X

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 7.
II)
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

EC-384
 EXIT
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. GI
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothy forward and backward according to the valve opening MA
steps.

EM

LC

FE
SEF328X

OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.
AX
7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II
Without CONSULT-II SU
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. BR
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position.
ST

RS

BT

HA
SEF560W

OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve. EL

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT IDX

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-385
 DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY EXIT
CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0214

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of front and rear
heated oxygen sensors.
A warm-up three way catalyst with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of rear heated oxygen sen-
sor. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the rear heated oxy-
gen sensor switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of front and rear heated oxygen sensors
approaches a specified limit value, the warm-up three way catalyst
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF184UB
Malfunction is detected when warm-up three way catalyst does not
operate properly, warm-up three way catalyst does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.

Possible Cause NHEC0504

I Warm-up three way catalyst
I Exhaust tube
I Intake air leaks
I Injectors
I Injector leaks
I Spark plug
I Improper ignition timing

EC-386
DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY EXIT
CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0215

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
NHEC0215S01
MA
I Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
dure. EM
SEF557X I Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified
minutes below.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. LC
2) Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Rev engine up to 3,000±500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive
minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. FE
5) Wait 5 seconds at idle.
6) Rev engine up to 2,500±500 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP”
of CATALYST changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately AT
5 minutes).
SEF559X
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1. AX
7) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
8) Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. SU
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-388.
BR

ST
SEF560X
RS
Overall Function Check NHEC0216
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the warm-up
three way catalyst. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be BT
confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. HA
WITH GST NHEC0216S01
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h SC
(43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
SEF329X
EL
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 63 (front
heated oxygen sensor right bank signal), 62 (front heated oxy-
gen sensor left bank signal) and engine ground, and ECM ter- IDX
minals 72 (rear heated oxygen sensor right bank signal), 71
(rear heated oxygen sensor left bank signal) and engine
ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 72 and engine ground, or 71 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 63 and
engine ground, or 62 and engine ground.
SEF330X Switching frequency ratio = A/B

EC-387
 DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY EXIT
CATALYST FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
A: Rear heated oxygen sensor voltage switching fre-
quency
B: Front heated oxygen sensor voltage switching fre-
quency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means warm-up three way
catalyst does not operate properly. Go to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-388.
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal 62 or 63 does not switch periodically more
than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 5, perform trouble diagno-
sis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-232.)
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0217

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace.

2 CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before the warm-up three way catalyst.

SEF099P

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace.

3 CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace.

EC-388
 DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY EXIT
CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

GI

MA

EM
MTBL0382

OK or NG
LC
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Follow the “Basic Inspection”.

5 CHECK INJECTORS
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for Injectors, EC-665. FE
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 107 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF331X

OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure”, “INJECTOR”, EC-666. RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-389
 DTC P0420 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P0430 (LEFT BANK, -B2) THREE WAY EXIT
CATALYST FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.

SEF575Q

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-544.

7 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EC-53.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) © GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.) © Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
Trouble is fixed. © INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed. © Replace warm-up three way catalyst.

EC-390
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0218

NOTE:
If DTC P0440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-620.) GI
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine
intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the MA
line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line EM
between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be
closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge LC
volume control solenoid valve is opened to depressurize the EVAP
purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.

FE

AT

AX

SEF323U SU
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak,
EVAP control system does not operate properly. BR
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
ST
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may RS
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
BT

HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0510
I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve IDX
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

EC-391
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
I Absolute pressure sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Fuel level sensor and the circuit
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0219

NOTE:
I If DTC P0440 or P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-620.)
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
SEF565X surface.
I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0219S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
SEF566X
5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-111.
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-393.

SEF567X

EC-392
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
WITH GST NHEC0219S02 GI
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-76
before driving vehicle. MA
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-76.
EM
3) Stop vehicle.
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. LC
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-76. FE
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnos- AT
tic Procedure”, EC-393.
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Proce- AX
dure” for DTC P1447, EC-611.
I If P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the screen,
go to the following step. SU
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
BR

ST

RS
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0220

1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

BT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
HA

SC

EL

SEF915U IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

EC-393
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

SEF105W

SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

EC-394
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.

GI

MA

EM

LC
AEC649A

FE

AT

AX
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. SU
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 6.
Models without CON- © GO TO 7. BR
SULT-II

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-395
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37.

SEF200U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace.

EC-396
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of GI
test.)
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
MA

EM

LC

SEF254X
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove FE
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. AT
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF200U RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. BT
NG © Repair or replace.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-397
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.

SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace water separator.

9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT

Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-413.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.

10 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

SEF596U

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 14.
II)

EC-398
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
GI
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 14. MA
II)
NG © GO TO 12. EM

12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

LC
Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

FE
13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
AT
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%. AX
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF722X

OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15. HA

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

SC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine. EL
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. IDX
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © GO TO 15.

EC-399
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-27.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 16.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 17.
II)
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.

16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.

PEF882U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.

EC-400
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

17 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF266X

FE

AT

AX
SEF334X

Without CONSULT-II SU
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF266X

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF335X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

EC-401
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

18 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.

SEF257X
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.

SEF300X
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor.

19 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure.

SEF587X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 20.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

EC-402
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

20 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. FE
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. AT
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m RS
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
BT
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
HA
21 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. SC
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-33.
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 22.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.
IDX
22 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 23.

EC-403
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

23 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE

Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connec-
tion. For location, refer to “ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)”, EC-39.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

24 CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE

Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 25.
NG © Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.

25 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage.

SEF141W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 26.
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

26 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to EL-157, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 27.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

EC-404
 EXIT
DTC P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

27 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-405
 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
Description

Description NHEC0221
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0221S01

ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal EVAP can-

EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Front heated oxygen sensors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0221S02

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.

SEF337U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0222
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%

I Air conditioner switch “OFF”
PURG VOL C/V
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm —

EC-406
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0224

Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve.
GI

MA

EM

Possible Cause NHEC0511

LC
I Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

FE

AT

DTC Confirmation Procedure AX

NHEC0225
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, SU
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: BR
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
ST
NHEC0225S01

PEF357V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-409. BT
WITH GST NHEC0225S02
Follow the proocedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-407
 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0226

MEC741C

SEF667X

EC-408
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0227

1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester. FE

AT

AX

SU

SEF333X BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. ST
NG © GO TO 2.
RS
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. BT
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
HA
© Repair harness or connectors.
SC

EL

IDX

EC-409
 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 5.
II)
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connetors.

4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.

PEF882U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-410
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EXIT
(CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF334X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF335X

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ST

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT RS

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-411
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0228

The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
SEF032W
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.

SEF267X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0229
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0231

Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve.

Possible Cause NHEC0512

I Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister vent control valve

EC-412
DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0232

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery MA
voltage is more than 11V at idle.

EM

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0232S01 LC

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-415.
FE
WITH GST NHEC0232S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
AT
PEF357V

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-413
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0233

MEC742C

SEF668X

EC-414
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0234

1 INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
GI
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
MA
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

EM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn “ON”. LC
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.

FE

AT

AX
PEF883U
4. Check for operating sound of the valve. SU
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 3.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-415
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.

SEF267X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF336X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M5, B1
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

EC-416
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49 GI
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MA
7 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
EM
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I FE

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF337X

OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-417
 DTC P0446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.

10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III

1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 9 again.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-418
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0235

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is GI
not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board
diagnosis.
MA

EM
SEF053V

LC

FE

AT
SEF954S

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AX

Mode NHEC0236
Specification data are reference values. SU
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V BR

ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0238
Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal from
EVAP control system pressure sensor is sent to ECM. BT

HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0513
I Harness or connectors IDX
(The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure sensor is
clogged, vent, kinked, disconnected or improper connection.
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I EVAP canister

EC-419
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water
separator

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0239

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0239S01

1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6) Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-422.
PEF886U WITH GST NHEC0239S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 92 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-422.

SEF340X

EC-420
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0240

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC815C

EL

IDX

SEF623X

EC-421
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0241

1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check rubber tube connected to the EVAP control system pressure sensor for clogging, vent, kink, disconnection or
improper connection.

SEF268X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Reconnect, repair or replace.

2 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 3.

3 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace harness connector.

EC-422
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF341X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. FE

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART AT

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49 AX
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors. SU

6 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
BR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. ST
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. BT

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART HA

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49 SC
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM (Transmission Control Module)
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EL

IDX

EC-423
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 10.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 11.
II)
NG © GO TO 9.

9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.

PEF882U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

EC-424
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF266X

FE

AT

AX
SEF334X

Without CONSULT-II SU
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF266X

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF335X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

EC-425
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EC-426
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. FE

AT

AX

SU

SEF339X BR
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
RS
15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
BT
1. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 14 again.
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. SC

EL

IDX

EC-427
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

16 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5
m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

17 CHECK RUBBER TUBE

Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.

EC-428
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

18 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. GI
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.

MA

EM

LC

SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: FE
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace water separator.
AX
19 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
SU
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF596U

Yes or No
HA
Yes © GO TO 20.
No © GO TO 22. SC

20 CHECK EVAP CANISTER EL

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.

EC-429
DTC P0450 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE EXIT
SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

21 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

22 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Disconnect harness connectors B2, M2.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector M2 terminal 10 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 24.
NG © GO TO 23.

23 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Joint connector-17
I Harness for open or short between harness connector M2 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

24 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-430
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0644

NOTE:
If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-620.) GI
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.)
in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve. MA

EM

LC

SEF323U FE
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a very large
leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not AT
operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replace- AX
ment. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
SU
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. BR

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0645
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve BT
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. HA
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. SC
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EL
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor IDX
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the
circuit
I Absolute pressure sensor
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.

EC-431
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0646

CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Pro-
cedure.
NOTE:
I If DTC P0455 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-620.)
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
SEF565X conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
dures.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0646S01
1) Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SEF566X
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
5) Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
SEF874X If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-111.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If
it is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-433.
If P0440 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440.

SEF567X

EC-432
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH GST NHEC0646S02
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving Pattern” on EC-76
before driving vehicle.
GI
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-76.
3) Stop vehicle. MA
4) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
EM
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6) Start engine. LC
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-76.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic FE
Procedure”, EC-433.
I If P0440 or P1440 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, for DTC P0440, EC-393. AT
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Proce-
dure” for DTC P1447, EC-611.
I If P0455, P0440, P1440 and P1447 are not displayed on the
AX
screen, go to the following step.
10) Select “MODE 1” with GST. SU
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
BR

ST

RS
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0647

1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

BT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
HA

SC

EL

SEF915U IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

EC-433
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

SEF105W

SEF943S
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

EC-434
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission System”, EC-33.
OK or NG
GI
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose. MA

6 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE EM

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 7. LC

7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE, O-RING AND CIRCUIT

Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-413.
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring or harness/connector.
AT
8 INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
AX
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.

SU

BR

ST

RS
AEC649A

BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
IDX
Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 9.
Models without CON- © GO TO 10.
SULT-II

EC-435
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37.

SEF200U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair or replace.

EC-436
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of GI
test.)
3. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum cut valve bypass valve. The valve will open. (Continue to apply 12V until the end of test.)
MA

EM

LC

SEF254X
4. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove FE
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. AT
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
5. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF200U RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. BT
NG © Repair or replace.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-437
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100.0%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

SEF722X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.

12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 13.

13 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-27.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 15.
II)
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.

EC-438
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according GI
to the valve opening.

MA

EM

LC

PEF882U

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-439
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

SEF266X

SEF334X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

SEF266X

SEF335X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

EC-440
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

16 CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF257X
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM terminal 80 and engine ground under the following
conditions.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF300X
CAUTION: BR
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg) or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace absolute pressure sensor. RS

17 CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR BT

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun
as shown in the figure. HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF587X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

EC-441
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

18 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

19 CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR LINE

Check refueling EVAP vapor line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connec-
tion. For location, refer to “ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)”, EC-39.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 20.
NG © Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

20 CHECK SIGNAL LINE AND RECIRCULATION LINE

Check signal line and recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 21.
NG © Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.

EC-442
 EXIT
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (GROSS LEAK)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

21 CHECK REFUELING CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends A and B.
Blow air into the hose end B. Air should flow freely into the fuel tank. GI
3. Blow air into hose end A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends A and B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and a suitable
3-way connector. Check that there is no leakage. MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SEF141W SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 22. BR
NG © Replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.

ST
22 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
RS
© INSPECTION END

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-443
 EXIT
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0616

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

SEF614X

On Board Diagnostic Logic NHEC0617

When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank
is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel
level sensor malfunction is detected.
Malfunction is detected when even though the vehicle is parked, a
signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.

Possible Cause NHEC0618

I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0619

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0619S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
SEF563X 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-446.
WITH GST NHEC0619S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-444
 EXIT
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0620

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC828C

EL

IDX

EC-445
 EXIT
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NHEC0621

1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or a tester.

SEF524Z

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M6, B3
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor until and fuel pump
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2, ECM terminal
59 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-446
 EXIT
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION (SLOSH)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness connectors M46, F44 GI
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MA
6 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-157, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
LC
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. FE
© INSPECTION END
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-447
 EXIT
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Component Description

Component Description =NHEC0622

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

SEF614X

On Board Diagnostic Logic NHEC0623

Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not
moving even after a long distance has been driven.
Malfunction is detected when the output signal of the fuel level
sensor does not change within the specified range even though the
vehicle has been driven a long distance.

Possible Cause NHEC0624

I Harness or connectors
(The level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor

Overall Function Check NHEC0625

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level
sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the
handling of the fuel. Refer to FE-6 “Fuel Tank”.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining
fuel and refilling fuel is required.

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0625S01

NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30  (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-51.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
SEF563X removed.
EC-448
 EXIT
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUNCTION
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds then
turn “ON”.
6) Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
GI
8) Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II. MA
9) Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30  (7-7/8 US gal,
6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30  (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). EM
11) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
12) Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether LC
the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11.
If NG, check the fuel level sensor, refer to EL-157, “FUEL
LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.

FE

AT

WITH GST AX
NHEC0625S02
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel
cannot be drained by 30  (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in SU
advance.
1) Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. BR
2) Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to “Fuel Pressure
Release”, EC-51.
3) Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. ST
4) Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was
SEF615X removed.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. RS
6) Set voltmeters probe between ECM terminal 83 (fuel level
sensor signal) and ground. BT
7) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
8) Check voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground and note
it. HA
9) Drain fuel by 30  (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel
tank using proper equipment.
10) Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30  (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
SC
11) Confirm that the voltage between ECM terminal 83 and ground
changes more than 0.03V during step 8 - 10. EL
If NG, check component of fuel level sensor, refer to EL-157,
“FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK”.
IDX

EC-449
 EXIT
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0626

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

SEF614X

On Board Diagnostic Logic NHEC0627

ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit
malfunction.
Malfunction is detected when an excessively low or high voltage is
sent from the sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible Cause NHEC0628

I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0629

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”.

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0629S01

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-452.
WITH GST NHEC0629S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

SEF563X

EC-450
 EXIT
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0630

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC877C

EL

IDX

EC-451
 EXIT
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NHEC0631

1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor until and fuel pump harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF524Z

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M6, B3
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuel level sensor until and fuel pump
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 and body ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2. Refer to Wir-
ing Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-452
 EXIT
DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness connectors M46, F44 GI
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel level sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness on connectors.
MA
6 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-157, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
LC
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. FE
© INSPECTION END
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-453
 EXIT
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Component Description

Component Description =NHEC0242

The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.

AEC110

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0244

Malfunction is detected when the almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal
from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
being driven.

Possible Cause NHEC0514

I Harness or connector
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Vehicle speed sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0245

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0245S01
1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
2) Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-457.
If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
PEF199V

EC-454
 EXIT
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive
seconds.
CKPS·RPM (REF) 1,400 - 2,400 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) GI

B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 8 msec

Selector lever Suitable position

MA
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
EM
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-457.
LC

FE

AT

Overall Function Check AX

NHEC0246
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not SU
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1) Lift up drive wheels.
NHEC0246S01
BR
2) Start engine.
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST. ST
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed
10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear posi-
tion. RS
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-457.

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-455
 EXIT
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0247

MEC816C

SEF965X

EC-456
 EXIT
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0248

1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
GI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 86 and combination meter terminal 32.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. MA
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG EM
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2. LC

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter FE
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

AT
3 CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION
Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
SU
NG © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

BR
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M81, F49 ST
I Harness connectors F19, F111
I Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and ECM RS
I Harness for open or short between vehicle speed sensor and TCM (Transmission control module)
OK or NG
BT
OK © Check combination meter and vehicle speed sensor. Refer to EL section.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
HA
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. SC
© INSPECTION END
EL

IDX

EC-457
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Description

Description NHEC0249
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0249S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Park/neutral position Idle air

IACV-AAC valve
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation control

Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal

Battery Battery voltage

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Ambient air temperature switch Ambient air temperature

Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature

Absolute pressure sensor Ambient barometic pressure

This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified

level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the
amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC
valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass
passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actu-
ated by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in
the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output sig-
nals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respec-
tive opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step
advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The
crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step
position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with
the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The opti-
mum value stored in the ECM is determined by takig into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up,
deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and
cooling fan operation).

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0249S02

IACV-AAC Valve NHEC0249S0201
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in seqeunce. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change tha auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
SEF765P
at that particular opening.

EC-458
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0250
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
GI
I Engine: After warming up Idle 2 - 10 step
IACV-AAC/V
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” MA
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm —
EM

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0252

LC
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly,
(Malfunction B) the IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly.

FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0515
MALFUNCTION A NHEC0515S01
I Harness or connectors SU
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
I IACV-AAC valve
BR
MALFUNCTION B NHEC0515S02
I Harness or connectors
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.) ST
I Air control valve (Power steering)
I IACV-AAC valve
RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0253
NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously BT
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st HA
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B”.
I If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, per-
SC
form “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67, before conducting
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, EL
refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”,
EC-700.
IDX

EC-459
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0253S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch “ON”.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0253S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for three seconds, then let it
PEF360V idle for three seconds.
Do not rev engine to more than 3,000 rpm.
5) Perform step 4 once more.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-462.
With GST NHEC0253S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0253S02

TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
I Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C
(14°F).
With CONSULT-II NHEC0253S0201
1) Open engine hood.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
PEF361V 3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-462.
With GST NHEC0253S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-460
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0254

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC817C

EL

IDX

SEF625X

EC-461
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0255

1 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.

SEF269X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF343X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay
© Repair harness or connectors.

EC-462
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and IACV-AAC valve terminals as follows. GI
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MA

EM
MTBL0354
Continuity should exist. LC
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
FE
4 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I
AT
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
3. Start engine and let it idle. AX
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SEF971X
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist.
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace air control valve (Power steering). HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-463
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II

Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.

SEF971X
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 6.

6 CHECK VACUUM PORT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to air control valve (Power steering) at vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely.

SEF972X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or clean vacuum port.

EC-464
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control valve (Power steer-
ing) and intake air duct.
2. Check the hoses and tubes for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF109L

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. FE
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
AT
8 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-I
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. AX
2. Check resistance between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.

SU

BR

ST

SEF344X
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. BT
NG © Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-465
 DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV) — AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL EXIT
(AAC) VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE-II

1. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-AAC valve makes operating sound according to the ignition
switch position.

SEF589X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.

10 REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE

1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67.
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.

11 CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hoses.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
I For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates
less than 0.9V.
I For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
700±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67

12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-466
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0256

A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control. GI
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume MA
control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunc-
tioning.
EM
SEF505V

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor LC

Mode NHEC0257
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up, idle Throttle valve: Idle position ON

CLSD THL/P SW* FE
the engine Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF

*: This item is not available. AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0259
Malfunction is detected when battery voltage from the closed
throttle position switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve SU
opened.

BR

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0516
I Harness or connectors
(The closed throttle position switch circuit is shorted.) BT
I Closed throttle position switch
I Throttle position sensor
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-467
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0260

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0260S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
SEF092X 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
start engine.
3) Select “CLSD THL/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
If “CLSD THL/P SW” is not available, go to step 5.
4) Check the signal under the following conditions.
Condition Signal indication

Throttle valve: Idle position ON

Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF

If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-471.

PEF329U
If OK, go to following step.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
THRTL POS SEN More than 2.5V

VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)

Selector lever Suitable position

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load)

Driving location will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.

7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,

EC-471.

Overall Function Check NHEC0261

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0261S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Check the voltage between ECM terminal 56 (Closed throttle
position switch signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
SEF345X At idle: Battery voltage

EC-468
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
At 2,000 rpm: Approximately 0V
3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-471.

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-469
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0262

MEC818C

SEF626X

EC-470
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0263

1 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF260X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF346X
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART RS

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18 BT
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM relay
I Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and ECM
© Repair harness or connectors. HA

3 CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT SC
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and throttle position switch terminal 4. EL
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-471
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND ENGINE IDLE SPEED

Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

MTBL0383

Models with CONSULT-II © GO TO 5.

Models without CON- © GO TO 6.
SULT-II

5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.

MTBL0355

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-472
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. GI
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of MA
the throttle opener.

EM

LC

FE
SEF793W
6. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
7. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. AT
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF347X

OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 7.
BT
7 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111. HA

SC

EL

MTBL0382 IDX
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 8.
Yes (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 9.
II)
No © Replace throttle position switch.

EC-473
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditins.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.

MTBL0230

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor.

EC-474
 EXIT
DTC P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). GI
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of MA
the throttle opener.

EM

LC

FE
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground. AT
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF348X

OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor.
BT
10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. HA
© INSPECTION END
SC

EL

IDX

EC-475
 EXIT
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
System Description

System Description NHEC0264

This circuit line (LAN) is used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in TCM but also ECM after the A/T
related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0266

Malfunction is detected when ECM receives incorrect voltage from
TCM (Transmission Control Module) continuously.

Possible Cause NHEC0517

I Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module) is open or shorted.]
I TCM
I Dead (Weak) battery

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0267

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0267S01

PEF391V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 2 seconds.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-478.

EC-476
 EXIT
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0269

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC747C

EL

IDX

SEF629X

EC-477
 EXIT
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0270

1 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.

SEF270X

SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and TCM terminal 33.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness or connectors.

2 CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectos.

3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-478
 EXIT
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0271

The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode
selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The unit controls the engine. GI

MA

EM
SEC220B

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0272

LC
Malfunction is detected when ECM calculation function is
malfunctioning.

FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0518
I ECM
SU

BR

ST

RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0273
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, BT
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA

SC

EL
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0273S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
IDX
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Run engine for at least 30 seconds at idle speed.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-480.
WITH GST NHEC0273S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PEF357V

EC-479
 EXIT
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0274

1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-479.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-479.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © INSPECTION END

2 REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to “IVIS (INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)”, EC-84.
3. Perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-67,
Is the result CMPLT or INCMP?
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT © INSPECTION END
INCMP © Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.

EC-480
 EXIT
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0519

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the ther-
mostat even though the engine has run long enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat open stuck. GI
Malfunction is detected when the engine coolant temperature does
not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run
long enough. MA

EM

Possible Cause NHEC0520

LC
I Thermostat function
I Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
I Engine coolant temperature sensor

FE

AT

DTC Confirmation Procedure AX

NHEC0521
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, SU
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: BR
I For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C
(14°F) or higher.
I For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of ST
–10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0521S01
RS
1) Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to LC-14, “Thermo-
stat”. Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. BT
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with HA
CONSULT-II.
4) Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. SC
If it is above 60°C (140°F), stop engine and cool down the
engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5) Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following EL
conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) IDX
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-482.
WITH GST NHEC0521S02
1) Follow the prodedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-481
 EXIT
DTC P1126 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0522

1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
3. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals under the following conditions.

SEF304X

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

EC-482
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description

Description NHEC0523
If DTC P1130 is displayed with P1165, first perform trouble diag-
nosis for DTC P1165, EC-509.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GI
NHEC0523S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion MA
Throttle position sensor Throttle position

Ignition switch Start signal Swirl control valve control sole- EM

noid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal) " Vacuum signal
ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal) Swirl control valve actuator LC
"
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Swirl control valve

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

This system has a swirl control valve in the intake passage of each
cylinder. FE
While idling and during low engine speed operation, the swirl con-
trol valve closes. Thus the velocity of the air in the intake passage
increases, promoting the vaporization of the fuel and producing a
AT
swirl in the combustion chamber.
Because of this operation, this system tends to increase the burn- AX
ing speed of the gas mixture, improve fuel consumption, and
increase the stability in running conditions.
Also, except when idling and during low engine speed operation, SU
this system opens the swirl control valve. In this condition, this
system tends to increase power by improving intake efficiency via
reduction of intake flow resistance, intake flow. BR
The solenoid valve controls swirl control valve’s shut/open condi-
tion. This solenoid valve is operated by the ECM.
Throttle position Swirl control valve
ST
sensor (Idle posi- Engine speed control solenoid Swirl control valve
tion) valve
RS
ON Below 3,200 rpm ON Closed

Less than 3,200

rpm
ON Closed BT
OFF
More than 3,600
OFF Open
rpm HA
When engine coolant temperature is below 10°C (50°F) and above 55°C (131°F),
swirl control valve is kept open regardless of above condition.
SC

EL

IDX

SEF372X

EC-483
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0523S02
Swirl Control Valve Control Solenoid Valve NHEC0523S0201
The swirl control valve control solenoid valve responds to signals
from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the
solenoid valve is bypassed to apply intake manifold vacuum to the
swirl control valve actuator. This operation closes the swirl control
valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal is
cut and the swirl control valve opens.

SEF272X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0524
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Engine coolant temperature is

between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C ON
SWRL CONT S/V I Engine speed: Idle (122°F).

Engine coolant temperature is

OFF
above 55°C (131°F).

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0526

Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through
swirl control valve control solenoid valve,
(Malfunction B) The vacuum signal is not sent to swirl control
valve under specified driving conditions, even though swirl control
valve control solenoid valve is ON,
(Malfunction C) The vacuum signal is sent to swirl control valve
even though swirl control valve control solenoid valve is OFF.

Possible Cause NHEC0527

MALFUNCTION A NHEC0527S01
I Harness or connectors
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
MALFUNCTION B NHEC0527S02
I Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is open.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I Intake system
(Intake air leaks)
I Hoses and tubes between intake manifold, vacuum tank and
swirl control valve actuator
I Swirl control valve actuator
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I Mass air flow sensor
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Throttle position sensor

EC-484
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION C NHEC0527S03
I Harness or connector
(The swirl control valve control solenoid valve circuit is
shorted.)
GI
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Throttle position sensor MA
I Hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve
vacuum check switch
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve EM

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0528

LC
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on “Procedure for malfunc-
tion B”, perform “Procedure for malfunction C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, FE
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
AT

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AX

NHEC0528S01
With CONSULT-II NHEC0528S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. SU
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, BR
EC-488.
With GST NHEC0528S0102 ST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF357V
RS
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0528S02
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F). BT
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine
immediately. HA
With CONSULT-II NHEC0528S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SC
2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
PEF565W 3) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with EL
CONSULT-II.
4) Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is 40°C (104°F) or less.
If the value is more than 40°C (104°F), park the vehicle in a IDX
cool place and retry from step 1.
5) Start engine and wait until COOLAN TEMP/S value increases
to more than 55°C (131°F).
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-488.
With GST NHEC0528S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-485
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C NHEC0528S03
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0528S0301
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONITOR”
PEF565W mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip
DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-488.
With GST NHEC0528S0302
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-486
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0529

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC749C

EL

IDX

SEF627X

EC-487
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0530

PROCEDURE A NHEC0530S01

1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.

PEF563W
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-488
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF619X

OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
ST
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. RS
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse BT
© Repair harness or connectors.
HA
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
SC
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
EL
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

EC-489
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF620X

Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF708X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-490
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B NHEC0530S02

1 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Check intake air system for air leaks. GI
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2. MA
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 3.
II)
EM
NG © Repair intake system.

LC
2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.

FE

AT

AX

SU
PEF563W
3. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-491
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.

SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF619X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

EC-492
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK HOSES
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold, and swirl control valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection
or disconnection.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF109L

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.
FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-493
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF620X

Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF708X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.

EC-494
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
2. Start engine and let it idle. GI
3. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
5. Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to “SWIRL CONT SOL/V indication. MA

EM

LC

SEF621X FE

Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect vacuum hose between swirl control valve actuator and swirl control valve control solenoid valve. AT
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Apply 12V direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
4. Make sure that swirl control valve actuator rod moves according to 12V direct current being applied. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF621X RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. BT
NG © Replace swirl control valve and actuator.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-495
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.

SEF709X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.

10 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 61 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.

SEF298X
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 12.
II)
NG © Replace mass air flow sensor.

EC-496
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). GI
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of MA
the throttle opener.

EM

LC

FE
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. AT
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF307X

OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13. BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-497
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.

MTBL0231

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.

13 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

MTBL0382

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

EC-498
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

14 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF585P

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15. FE
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
AT
15 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF350X
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
BT
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).

HA
16 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
SC

PROCEDURE C NHEC0530S03 EL
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
IDX
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

EC-499
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.

PEF563W
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the swirl control valve control solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect swirl control valve control solenoid valve harness connector.

SEF272X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF619X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-500
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse GI
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.
MA
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT EM
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. LC
Continuity should exist.
4. Also, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
FE
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

6 CHECK HOSES AT
Check hoses and tubes between air cleaner and swirl control valve vacuum check switch for clogging or improper connec-
tion. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF109L RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. BT
NG © Repair hoses or tubes.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-501
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF620X

Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF708X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.

EC-502
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch. GI
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions.
MA

EM

LC

SEF709X

OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch. AT

9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-I AX

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
3. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping. SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF585P
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. HA
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
SC

EL

IDX

EC-503
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (REF)-II

Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2.

SEF350X

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 11.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 12.
II)
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).

EC-504
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). GI
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of MA
the throttle opener.

EM

LC

FE
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. AT
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF307X

OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13. BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-505
 EXIT
DTC P1130 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine (ignition switch OFF).
3. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the opener.
5. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.

MTBL0231

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13.

13 ADJUST CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

Adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

MTBL0382

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-506
DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP EXIT
CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0282

★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic.
Malfunction is detected when the closed loop control function for
right bank does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the GI
specified condition, the closed loop control function for left bank
does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified
condition. MA

EM

Possible Cause NHEC0531

LC
I The front heated oxygen sensor circuit is open or shorted.
I Front heated oxygen sensor
I Front heated oxygen sensor heater

FE

AT

DTC Confirmation Procedure AX

NHEC0283
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. SU
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds BR
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the ST
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”. If the engine speed limit is
exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
RS
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
BT

HA

SC

EL
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0283S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
IDX
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the follow-
ing.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least
once.
I “FR O2 SEN-B1 (-B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least
once.
If the check result is NG, perform “Diagnosis Procedure”,
PEF392V EC-508.
EC-507
 DTC P1148 (RIGHT BANK, -B1), P1168 (LEFT BANK, -B2) CLOSED LOOP EXIT
CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
4) Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
5) Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive sec-
onds.
B/FUEL SCHDL 3 msec or more

CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,800 - 3,000 rpm

Selector lever Suitable position

VHCL SPEED SE More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)

During this test, P0130 and/or P0150 may be displayed on

CONSULT-II screen.
6) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-508.

Overall Function Check NHEC0284

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0284S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 63 (Front heated
oxygen sensor right bank signal) or 62 (Front heated oxygen
sensor left bank signal) and engine ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
SEF308X stant under no-load.
I The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
I The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
4) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-508.

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0285

Perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153”, EC-232.

EC-508
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0532

The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch detects
vacuum signal to the swirl control valve, and sends “ON” or “OFF”
signal to the ECM. GI
When vacuum is supplied to the valve, the swirl control valve con-
trol vacuum check switch sends “OFF” signal to the ECM.
The swirl control valve control vacuum check switch is not used to MA
control the engine system, it is used for on board diagnosis.

EM
SEF273X

LC

FE

AT
SEF372X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AX

Mode NHEC0533
Specification data are reference values. SU
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine speed: Idle

OFF
BR
I Engine coolant temperature is between 15°C (59°F) to 50°C (122°F).
SWL CON VC SW
I Engine speed: Idle
I Engine coolant temperature is above 55°C (131°F).
ON ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0535
Malfunction is detected when the swirl control valve control vacuum
check switch remains “OFF” under specified engine conditions. BT

HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0536
I Harness or connectors IDX
(Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch circuit is
open.)
I Hoses
(Hoses are clogged or connected incorrectly.)
I Swirl control valve control solenoid valve
I Swirl control valve control vacuum check switch

EC-509
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0537

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0537S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
PEF357V 2) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and wait at
least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-512.
WITH GST NHEC0537S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-510
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0538

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC750C

EL

IDX

SEF628X

EC-511
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0539

1 CHECK HOSES
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check hose for clogging or improper connection.

SEF109L

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or reconnect the hose.

2 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Disconnect swirl control valve control vacuum check switch harness connector.

SEF273X
2. Check harness continuity between terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between swirl control valve control vacuum check switch and engine ground
© Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

EC-512
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and swirl control valve control vacuum check switch terminal 1. GI
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. EM
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

LC
5 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
3. Attach vacuum pump to swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 55 and ground under the following conditions. FE

AT

AX

SU

SEF709X BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. ST
NG © Replace swirl control valve control vacuum check switch.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-513
 EXIT
DTC P1165 SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK SWIRL CONTROL VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect the disconnected harness connectors.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
4. Select “SWIRL CONT SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF620X

Without CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Remove vacuum hose connected to swirl control valve actuator.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between swirl control valve control solenoid valve terminals and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF708X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace intake manifold collector assembly.

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-514
 EXIT
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description

Description NHEC0540
The malfunction information related to ABS/TCS control unit is
transferred through the line (LAN) from ABS/TCS control unit to
ECM. GI
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only for ABS/TCS control unit but also for ECM after the ABS/
TCS related repair. MA
DTC ERASING PROCEDURE FOR ABS/TCS RELATED
REPAIR NHEC0540S01 EM
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn it “ON”.
SEF280X
2) Connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
3) Select “ABS” and touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. LC
4) Touch “ERASE”.
5) Touch “BACK” then erase malfunction code which has been
stored in the TCM or ECM.

FE

AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0542
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS
control unit. The MIL will not light up for ABS/TCS control unit. SU
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) ECM receives incorrect voltage from ABS/TCS
control unit continuously, BR
(Malfunction B) TCS operation (Fuel cut) continues for an abnor-
mally long time.
ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0543
I ABS/TCS control unit
I TCS related parts (Refer to BR section.) BT

HA

SC

EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0544
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC IDX
cannot be confirmed, perform “Overall Function Check”, “Pro-
cedure for malfunction B”.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0544S01
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
With CONSULT-II NHEC0544S0101
PEF357V 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-515
 EXIT
DTC P1211 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-516.

Overall Function Check NHEC0545

Use this procedure to check the overall function of ABS/TCS con-
trol unit. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0545S01
1) Lift up driving wheels.
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Place TCS OFF switch in “ON” position.
4) Drive vehicle with “D” position (OD “ON” or “OFF”) and check
engine running conditions as follows.
Engine speed (“D” position) Engine running condition

Idle Normal

More than 1,600 rpm Rough

5) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-516.

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0546

If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction
A”, perform “Procedure A”. If the trouble is duplicated after
“Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure B”.
PROCEDURE A NHEC0546S01
Go to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE” of “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES” in BR section.
PROCEDURE B NHEC0546S02

1 CHECK DRIVING CONDITION

Ask a customer if he or she has driven the vehicle under abnormal condition such as:
I driving with front wheels slipping for a long time.
I driving with front wheels lifted up for a long time.
Yes or No
Yes © INSPECTION END (NO FAILURE)
No © Go to BR-112, “Poor Acceleration”.

EC-516
 EXIT
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description

Description NHEC0547
This circuit line is used to control the smooth engine operation of
ABS/TCS during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged
between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit. GI
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only in ABS/TCS control unit but also ECM after the ABS/TCS
related repair. MA
DTC ERASING PROCEDURE FOR ABS/TCS RELATED
REPAIR NHEC0547S01 EM
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn it “ON”.
2) Connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
3) Select “ABS” and touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. LC
4) Touch “ERASE”.
5) Touch “BACK” then erase malfunction code which has been
stored in the TCM or ECM.

FE

AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0549
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS
communication line. The MIL will not light up for the ABS /TCS SU
communication line.
Malfunction is detected when ECM receives incorrect voltage from
ABS/TCS control unit continuously. BR

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0550
I Harness or connectors
(The communication line circuit between ECM and ABS/TCS BT
control unit is open or shorted.)
I ABS/TCS control unit
I Dead (Weak) battery
HA

SC

EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0551
TESTING CONDITION: IDX
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0551S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
4) If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
PEF357V EC-519.

EC-517
 EXIT
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0552

MEC758C

SEF629X

EC-518
 EXIT
DTC P1212 ABS/TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0553

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and ABS/TCS control unit harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF270X

FE

AT

AX

SEF280X
SU
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 114 and ABS/TCS control unit terminal 47.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. ST
NG © GO TO 2.
RS
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. BT
I Harness connectors E81, M15
I Harness connectors M47, F45
I Check harness for open or short between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit. HA
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SC
3 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
EL
© INSPECTION END

IDX

EC-519
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
System Description

System Description NHEC0554

COOLING FAN CONTROL NHEC0554S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan

Cooling fan relay(s)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal control

Ignition switch Start signal

The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refriger-
ant pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION NHEC0554S02

SEF578XA

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0555
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF

I Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates)

Engine coolant temperature is

OFF
94°C (201°F) or less

I After warming up engine, idle Engine coolant temperature is

COOLING FAN the engine. between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW
I Air conditioner switch: OFF (219°F)

Engine coolant temperature is

HIGH
105°C (221°F) or more

EC-520
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic =NHEC0557

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is GI
indicated.
Malfunction is detected when cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat), cooling fan system does not
operate properly (Overheat) and engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. MA

EM

Possible Cause NHEC0563

LC
I Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
I Cooling fan
I Radiator hose
I Radiator FE
I Radiator cap
I Water pump
I Thermostat AT
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-536. AX
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the cool-
ant following the procedure in the MA-14, “Changing Engine SU
Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1) Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a fill-
ing speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant BR
with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, “Anti-
freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”.
2) After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no ST
water-flow noise is emitted.
RS
Overall Function Check NHEC0558
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. BT
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from HA
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
SC
Then turn the cap all the way off.
SEF621W
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0558S01
EL
1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below IDX
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-525.
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-525.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SEF111X SULT-II.

EC-521
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-525.

EC-522
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0559

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC759C

EC-523
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

MEC879C

EC-524
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM
SEF630X

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0560

LC
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. FE
No © GO TO 4.

AT
2 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
AX

SU

BR

ST

AEC707
RS
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF646X
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-531.)

EC-525
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEF111X
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-534.)

EC-526
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
GI

MA

EM

LC
AEC707
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. FE

AT

AX

SU

SEC163BA
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE A, EC-531.)
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-527
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
5. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
7. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.

MEF613EA

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to PROCEDURE B, EC-534.)

6 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.

SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following for leak.
I Hose
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC-10, “Water Pump”.)
© Repair or replace.

EC-528
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SLC755A
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. FE
NG © Replace radiator cap.
AT
9 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat. AX
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. SU

BR

ST

RS

SLC343 BT
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: HA
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC-14, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace thermostat. EL

IDX

EC-529
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

SEF304X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

11 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-536.
© INSPECTION END

EC-530
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE A =NHEC0560S01

1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. GI
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA

EM

LC

SEF590X

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2. AT

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART AX

Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
SU
I 15A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse BR
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-531
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.

SEF304V
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-1 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cooling fan
motor-2 terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-532
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

Check continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF591X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relay.
FE
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF592X ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. RS
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.

BT
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
HA
© INSPECTION END

SC

EL

IDX

EC-533
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B =NHEC0560S02

1 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF593X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Joint connector-8
I Joint connector-9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and joint connectors-8, -9
© Repair harness or connectors.

3 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-2
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 7 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 6 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-534
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. GI
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. EM

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART LC

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, E17
I Joint connector-10
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. FE

6 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

AT
Check continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the following conditions.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF591X

OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace cooling fan relays.
BT
7 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation. HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF592X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace cooling fan motors.

EC-535
 EXIT
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (OVERHEAT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

1. Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating NHEC0561

Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —

I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper

2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-11, “RECOM-
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS”.

3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See MA-14, “Changing

in reservoir tank and Engine Coolant”.
radiator filler neck

4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See LC-9, “System

(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 Check”.
psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See LC-9, “System

Check”.

ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be See LC-14, “Thermostat”
lower radiator hoses hot and LC-16, “Radiator”.

ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-520).

OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemi- Negative —

cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer

ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving

I Coolant overflow to I Visual No overflow during driv- See MA-14, “Changing

reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant”.

OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from I Visual Should be initial level in See MA-13, “ENGINE
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank MAINTENANCE”.
tor

OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-42, “Inspection”.
gauge mum distortion (warping)

12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-61, “Inspection”.
tons walls or piston

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.

*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to LC-21, “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS”.

EC-536
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description

Description NHEC0564
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0564S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
tion
Actuator GI
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

MA
Fuel pump
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air FPCM
control
EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal

LC
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel
flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates
by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage sup-
plied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the
following conditions.
FE
Amount of
Conditions Supplied voltage
fuel flow

I Engine cranking
AT
I Engine coolant temperature is
Battery voltage
below 10°C (50°F). high
I Engine is running under heavy load
(11 - 14V) AX
and high speed conditions

Except the above low Approximately 9.6V SU

BR

ST

RS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0564S02
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control
the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage BT
supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
HA

SC

SEF421Q
EL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode NHEC0565 IDX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I When cranking engine HI

FPCM
I Idle at coolant temperatures above 10°C (50°F) LOW

I When cranking engine Approx. 0.4V

FPCM DR VOLT
I Idle at coolant temperatures above 10°C (50°F) Approx. 2.4V

EC-537
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0567

Malfunction is detected when An improper voltage signal from the
FPCM, which is supplied to a point between the fuel pump and the
dropping resistor, is detected by ECM.

Possible Cause NHEC0568

I Harness or connectors
(FPCM circuit is open or shorted.)
I Dropping resistor
I FPCM

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0569

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform test at temperature above 10°C (50°F).
I Confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
SEF647X
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0569S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine.
3) Hold vehicle at the following conditions for 12 seconds.
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,800 - 2,600 rpm

Vehicle speed 70 - 100 km/h (44 - 62 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 2 - 10 msec

Selector lever Suitable position

4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC

PROCEDURE”, EC-540.
WITH GST NHEC0569S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-538
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0570

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC875C

EL

IDX

SEF631X

EC-539
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0571

1 CHECK FPCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect FPCM harness connector.

SEF282X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between FPCM terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF594X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the harness for open or short between FPCM and fuel pump relay.
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-540
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK FPCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF283X
3. Check harness continuity between FPCM terminal 1 and body ground, dropping resistor terminal 1 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. AT
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

AX
4 CHECK FPCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF263X
2. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 3 and dropping resistor terminal 2, dropping resistor terminal 2 BT
and FPCM terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Check harness continuity between FPCM terminal 2 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground. Refer to HA
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. EL
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
IDX

EC-541
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK FPCM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 and FPCM terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open between ECM and FPCM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7 CHECK FPCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 94 and FPCM terminal 2 or fuel pump terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 94 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B2, M2
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness for open or short between ECM and FPCM or fuel pump
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9 CHECK DROPPING RESISTOR

Check resistance between dropping resistor terminals 1 and 2.

SEF595X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace dropping resistor.

EC-542
 EXIT
DTC P1220 FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK FPCM
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and let it idle. GI
3. Select “FPCM” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check “FPCM DR VOLT” indication when touching “HI” and “LOW” on CONSULT-II screen.
MA

EM

LC

SEF596X
FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. AT
3. Check voltage between FPCM terminal 2 and body ground under the following conditions.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF597X

OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace FPCM. BT

11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

HA
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
SC

EL

IDX

EC-543
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0286

IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR NHEC0286S01
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.

SEF274X

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0288

Malfunction is detected when the ignition signal in the primary cir-
cuit is not sent to ECM during engine cranking or running.

Possible Cause NHEC0572

I Harness or connectors (The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
I Condenser
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0289

NOTE:
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335, P0340, P1335
or P1336, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335,
P0340, P1335 or P1336 first. Refer to EC-356, EC-364,
EC-555 or EC-561.

PEF357V

EC-544
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0289S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to GI
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-549. MA
WITH GST NHEC0289S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-545
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0290

MEC819C

EC-546
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC752C

EC-547
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

MEC753C

EC-548
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF632X

FE

AT

Diagnostic Procedure AX
NHEC0291

1 CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
SU
Is engine running?
Yes or No BR
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 12. ST
II)
No © GO TO 3.
RS
2 SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II BT
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

PEF506W

© GO TO 12.

EC-549
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110, 112 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF366X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Go to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-158.

4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.

SEF275X
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF367X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-550
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF589PB
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6. AT

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART AX

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F18, E15
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser SU
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BR
7 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. ST

RS

BT

HA

SEF368X
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
EL
NG © GO TO 8.

IDX
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-551
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK ECM RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.

SEF296X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ECM relay.

10 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

11 CHECK CONDENSER
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.

SEF369X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace condenser.

EC-552
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF274X
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF370X

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © GO TO 13. ST

13 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART RS

Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F18.
© Repair or replace harness or connectors. BT

14 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

HA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. SC
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
IDX

EC-553
 EXIT
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

16 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Check resistance between ignition coil terminals 2 and 3.

SEF371X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-554
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0573

The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan
(upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead
Center) signal (120° signal). GI
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the
crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the MA
sensor also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is EM
SEF253P
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal
(120° signal). LC

FE

AT

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AX

Mode NHEC0574
Specification data are reference values. SU
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

CKPS·RPM (POS) I Tachometer: Connect

Almost the same speed as the
BR
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED value.
ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0576
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) 120° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few BT
seconds during engine cranking,
(Malfunction B) 120° signal is not entered to ECM during engine
running, HA
(Malfunction C) 120° signal cycle excessively changes during
engine running.
SC
FAIL-SAFE MODE NHEC0576S01
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
EL
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Compression TDC signal (120° signal) is controlled by camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
circuit signal and crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal. Ignition timing will be delayed 0° to 2°. IDX

EC-555
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Possible Cause

Possible Cause NHEC0577

I Harness or connectors
(The crankshaft position sensor (REF) circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (REF)
I Starter motor (Refer to SC section.)
I Starting system circuit (Refer to SC section.)
I Dead (Weak) battery

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0578

NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st
trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0578S01
With CONSULT-II NHEC0578S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-558.
With GST NHEC0578S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF002P

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C NHEC0578S02

With CONSULT-II NHEC0578S0201
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-558.
With GST NHEC0578S0202
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PEF357V

EC-556
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0579

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC754C

EL

IDX

SEF633X

EC-557
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0580

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 2.

2 CHECK CKPS (REF) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect CKPS (REF) harness connector.

SEF591PA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 65, 75 and CKPS (REF) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-558
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK CKPS (REF) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (REF) terminal 1 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist. GI
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
EM
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
LC
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (REF) and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

FE
6 CHECK CKPS (REF)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the CKPS (REF).
2. Visually check the CKPS (REF) for chipping. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEF585P ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. RS
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).
BT
7 CHECK CKPS (REF)-II
Check resistance between CKPS (REF) terminals 1 and 2. HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF350X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (REF).

EC-559
 EXIT
DTC P1335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (REF)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK CKPS (REF) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect harness connectors F43, F191.
3. Check harness continuity between harness connector F43 terminal 4 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9.

9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-560
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0292

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan
facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects
the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). GI
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When engine is running, the gap between the sensor and the gear
teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor MA
also changes.
Due to the permeability change, the magnetic flux near the core is
changed. Therefore, the voltage signal generated in the coil is EM
SEF254P
changed.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft
position signal (1° signal). LC

FE

AT

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AX

Mode NHEC0581
Specification data are reference values. SU
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

CKPS·RPM (POS) I Tachometer: Connect

Almost the same speed as the
BR
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II value.
ENG SPEED value.
ST

RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0294
Malfunction is detected when chipping of the signal plate (flywheel
or drive plate) gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM. BT

HA

SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0582
I Harness or connectors IDX
I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Signal plate (Drive plate/Flywheel)

EC-561
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0295

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0295S01

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 70 seconds at idle speed.
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-564.
WITH GST NHEC0295S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

PEF357V

EC-562
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0296

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC812C

EC-563
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

SEF664X

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0297

1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCERWS

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

SEF255X

© GO TO 2.

EC-564
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK CKPS (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF511WB
2. Check voltage between harness connector F25 terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

FE

AT

AX
SEF323X
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
BR
NG © GO TO 3.

ST
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171 RS
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS) BT
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

HA
4 CHECK CKPS (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
SC
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG EL
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. IDX

EC-565
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK CKPS (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 85 and harness connector F25 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6 CHECK CKPS (POS) SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect CKPS (POS) harness connector.

SEF367Q
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (POS) terminals and harness connector F171 terminals as follows.

MTBL0352
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7 CHECK CKPS (POS) INSTALLATION

Check that CKPS (POS) and front HO2S (Left bank) harness clamp are installed correctly as shown below.

SEM222F

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Install CKPS (POS) correctly.

EC-566
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION

1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, EC-562 again. GI
Is a 1st trip DTC P1336 detected?
Yes © GO TO 9. MA
No © INSPECTION END

EM
9 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
LC
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

FE

AT

AX

SEF587P
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
BR
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

ST
10 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. RS
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 85 and ground by briefly touching the sensor core with a flat-bladed screwdriver.

BT

HA

SC

EL
SEF324X

OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

EC-567
 EXIT
DTC P1336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKPS) (POS) (COG)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK CKPS (POS) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect harness connectors F25, F171.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector F25 terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © GO TO 12.

12 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F25, F171
I Joint connector-18
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F25 and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

13 CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate (flywheel or drive plate) gear tooth (cog).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Replace the signal plate (flywheel or drive plate).

14 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-568
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0305

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passage way. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passage way GI
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modi-
fies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature MA
increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis. EM
SEF599K

<Reference data> LC
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ

0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11

50 (122) 2.53 0.09 - 0.12

FE
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 74
(EGR temperature sensor) and ECM terminal 48 (ECM ground). AT
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF320U
RS
On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0306
Malfunction is detected when
(Malfunction A) an excessively low voltage from the EGR tem- BT
perature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant tem-
perature is low,
(Malfunction B) an excessively high voltage from the EGR tem- HA
perature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant tem-
perature is high.
SC

EL
Possible Cause NHEC0583
MALFUNCTION A NHEC0583S02 IDX
I Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
shorted.)
I EGR temperature sensor
I Malfunction of EGR function
MALFUNCTION B NHEC0583S03
I Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
open.)
I EGR temperature sensor
EC-569
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I Malfunction of EGR function

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0307

Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If 1st trip
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION B”.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NHEC0307S01

With CONSULT-II NHEC0307S0101
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 40°C (104°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool
the engine down.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-573.
PEF779U
With GST NHEC0307S0102
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

EC-570
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B NHEC0307S02
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION: GI
Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F).
With CONSULT-II
1)
NHEC0307S0201
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
MA
2) Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. EM
PEF569W 3) Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
4) Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to
50 step and check EGR TEMP SEN. LC
EGR TEMP SEN should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-573.
If the check result is OK, go to the following step.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
FE
6) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,200 - 2,400 rpm AT
PEF571W VHCL SPEED SE 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4 msec

AX
THRTL POS SEN 0.65 - 1.08V
SU
Selector lever Suitable position

7) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, BR

EC-573.

ST

RS
With GST NHEC0307S0202
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds, then BT
turn “ON”.
3) Select “MODE 1” with GST and maintain the following condi-
tions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. HA
Engine speed 1,200 - 2,400 rpm

Vehicle speed 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

SC
Voltage between ECM terminal 0.65 - 1.08V
SEF351X
91 and ground EL
Selector lever Suitable position
IDX
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-573.

EC-571
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0309

MEC011D

EC-572
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0310

1 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF277X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF896X
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART RS

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F4, F71 BT
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR temperature sensor
© Repair or replace harness or connectors.
HA
3 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SC
2. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. EL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. IDX
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-573
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F4, F71
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR temperature sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and EGR temperature sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

5 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove EGR temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

SEF353X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor.

EC-574
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve.
2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF588X

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 8. FE
II)
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.
AT
7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II
AX
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. SU
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening
steps.
BR

ST

RS

BT

SEF328X
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
SC
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.
EL

IDX

EC-575
 EXIT
DTC P1401 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF.
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position.

SEF560W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-576
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Description

Description NHEC0311
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0311S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM
tion
Actuator GI
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

MA
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal

LC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
EGR vol-
Battery Battery voltage ume con- EGR volume control valve
trol
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation

FE
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal

Electrical load Electrical load signal AT

Park/Neutral position switch Park/Neutral position

TCM (Transmission Control Module) Gear position, shifting signal AX

This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold
to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the SU
EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A
built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the
ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum BR
engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined
by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control
valve remains close under the following conditions. ST
I Engine stopped
I Engine starting
RS
I Engine idling
I Low engine coolant temperature
I Excessively high engine coolant temperature BT
I High engine speed
I Wide open throttle
HA
I Low battery voltage

SC

EL

IDX

SEF551W

EC-577
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0311S02
EGR Volume Control Valve NHEC0311S0203
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the
ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each
time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing
the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM
does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued
so that the valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0584
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

I Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step

I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
EGR VOL CON/V
I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
10 - 55 step
I No-load quickly

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0312

If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condi-
tion that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diag-
nosed.
Malfunction is detected when EGR flow is detected under condition
that does not call for EGR.
NOTE:
Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature
is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Therefore, it will be better to
turn ignition switch “ON” (start engine) at the engine coolant tem-
SEF073P perature below 30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation
procedure.

Possible Cause NHEC0586

I Harness or connectors
(EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EGR volume control valve leaking or stuck open
I EGR temperature sensor
I EGRC-BPT valve

EC-578
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0313

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds GI
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C MA
(14°F).
I Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must
be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II EM
PEF347U before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of
range below, the test cannot be conducted.
COOLAN TEMP/S: −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)*
LC
EGR TEMP SEN: Less than 4.8V
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park
the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine tempera-
ture to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine cool-
ant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means FE
other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccu-
rate diagnostic result.
*: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to AT
PEF612W 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it.
WITH CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0313S01
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and wait at least 10 seconds, and
then turn “ON”.
SU
2) Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Touch “START”. BR
4) Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take 80 seconds or
more.) ST
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition
PEF613W “OFF” and cool the engine coolant temperature to the
range of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F). Retry from step 1. RS
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-581. BT
WITH GST NHEC0313S02
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “MODE 1” with GST. HA
2) Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of
−10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F).
SC
3) Check that voltage between ECM terminal 74 (EGR tempera-
ture sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V.
PEF897U 4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. EL
5) Stop engine.
6) Perform from step 1 to 4.
7) Select “MODE 3” with GST. IDX
8) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-581.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is
recommended.

SEF354X

EC-579
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0314

MEC813C

SEF666X

EC-580
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0315

1 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF265X
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF327X

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
ST
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
RS
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness connectors F4, F71 BT
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and EGR volume control valve
© Repair harness or connectors.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-581
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.

MTBL0356
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F4, F71
I Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR volume control valve
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-582
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove EGR temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF353X RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
BT
NG © Replace EGR temperature sensor.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-583
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-I

Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.

SEF588X

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 8.
II)
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

7 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening
steps.

SEF328X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

EC-584
 EXIT
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE-II

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EGR volume control valve.
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. GI
3. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF.
4. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch
position. MA

EM

LC

SEF560W
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
AT
NG © Replace EGR volume control valve.

AX
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
SU
© INSPECTION END

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-585
 EXIT
DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0316

NOTE:
If DTC P1440 is displayed with P1448, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first. (See EC-620.)
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using of vapor
pressure in the fuel tank.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP
purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass valve will then be opened
to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve. The EVAP control system pressure
sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank.
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line
between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve.

SEF323U

Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system has a leak,

EVAP control system does not operate properly.
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may
come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

Possible Cause NHEC0587

I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

EC-586
 EXIT
DTC P1440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK) (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
Possible Cause (Cont’d)
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system pressure
sensor
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
GI
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I Absolute pressure sensor MA
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or dam-
aged.
EM
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water. LC
I Fuel level sensor and the circuit
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Refueling EVAP control valve
I ORVR system leaks
FE

AT

DTC Confirmation Procedure AX

NHEC0317
Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK)
(NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-391. SU

BR

ST

RS
Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0643
Refer to “P0440 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM (SMALL LEAK)
(NEGATIVE PRESSURE)”, EC-391. BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-587
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description

Description NHEC0319
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0319S01

ECM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

Ignition switch Start signal EVAP can-

EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position ister purge
control solenoid valve
flow control
Throttle position switch Closed throttle position

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Front heated oxygen sensors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow
rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by consider-
ing various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the
flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0319S02

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON
pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the
valve.

SEF337U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0320
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up Idle (Vehicle stopped) 0%

I Air conditioner switch “OFF”
PURG VOL C/V
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm —

EC-588
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0322

Malfunction is detected when the canister purge flow is detected
during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. GI

MA

EM

Possible Cause NHEC0588

LC
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve
is stuck open.)
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP canister FE
I Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)
AT

DTC Confirmation Procedure AX

NHEC0323
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, SU
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: BR
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-589
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0323S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4) Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”.
6) Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take for approximately 10
seconds.)
PEF614W If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-592.
WITH GST NHEC0323S02
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
PEF615W
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-592.

PEF902U

EC-590
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0324

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
MEC741C

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF667X

EC-591
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0325

1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.

SEF266X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and engine ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.

SEF333X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-592
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE

Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF268X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair it.
FE
5 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
AT
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
SU
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-593
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 8.
II)
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

EC-594
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. GI
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening. MA

EM

LC

PEF882U FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. AT
NG © GO TO 8.

AX
8 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF334X BT

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF335X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

EC-595
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

10 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EC-596
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. GI
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
MA

EM

LC

SEF338X
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13. RS
NG © GO TO 12.

BT
12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III
1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform procedure 9 again.
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
SC
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EL

IDX

EC-597
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

13 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.

SEF596U

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 14.
No © GO TO 17.

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 16.
NG © GO TO 15.

15 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separater for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

EC-598
 EXIT
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

16 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. GI
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.

MA

EM

LC

SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: FE
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Clean or replace water separator.
AX
17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
SU
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-599
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0326

The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
SEF032W
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.

SEF267X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0327
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0329

Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains closed under specified driving conditions.

Possible Cause NHEC0589

I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.

EC-600
DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0330

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: GI
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. MA
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0330S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. EM
PEF403V 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine.
4) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH) LC
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-603. FE
WITH GST NHEC0330S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-601
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0331

MEC742C

SEF668X

EC-602
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0332

1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
GI
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
MA

EM

LC

SEF267X

OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower. AT

2 CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

AX
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. SU
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with A, and then C plugged.

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF829T
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: HA
I Do not disassemble water separator.
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Clean or replace water separator.
EL

IDX

EC-603
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-604
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III

1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the procedure 4 again.
OK or NG
GI
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. MA

6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER EM

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
LC

FE

AT

SEF596U AX
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7. SU
No © GO TO 9.

BR
7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb). ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. RS
NG © GO TO 8.
BT
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. HA
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. SC

9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE EL

Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Repair it.

EC-605
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

EC-606
 DTC P1446 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (CLOSE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. FE
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. AT
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m RS
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
BT
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
HA
12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. SC
© INSPECTION END
EL

IDX

EC-607
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
System Description

System Description NHEC0333

NOTE:
If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0510 first. (See EC-467.)

SEF323U

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0334

Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output volt-
age indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not,
a fault is determined.
Malfunction is detected when EVAP control system does not oper-
ate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake mani-
fold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Possible Cause NHEC0590

I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck
closed
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
I Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
I Blocked rubber tube
I Cracked EVAP canister
I EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit
I Closed throttle position switch
I Blocked purge port
I EVAP canister vent control valve

EC-608
DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0335

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: GI
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
EM
PEF616W WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0335S01
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. LC
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4) Select “PURG FLOW P1447” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in
“DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. FE
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It AT
will take at least 35 seconds.)
PEF617W
Selector lever Suitable position AX
Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)

CKPS·RPM (POS) 500 - 3,000 rpm SU

B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 8.1 msec

Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) BR

If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from
step 2. ST
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
PEF905U RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-611. RS

BT

HA

SC

EL
Overall Function Check NHEC0336
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the IDX
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0336S01
1) Lift up drive wheels.
2) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to normal
operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF355X 4) Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.

EC-609
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
5) Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 84 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6) Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
7) Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON

Steering wheel Fully turned

Headlamp switch ON

Rear window defogger switch ON

Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm

Gear position Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R”

8) Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays

0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for
at least 1 second.
9) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-611.

EC-610
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NHEC0337

1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
GI
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2. MA
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 3.
II) EM
NG © Replace EVAP canister.

LC
2 CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.

FE

AT

AX

SU
AEC649A
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. BR
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
ST

RS

BT

HA
SEF598X
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 4.
EL

IDX

EC-611
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK PURGE FLOW

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and
install vacuum gauge.

AEC649A
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 6.
II)
NG © Repair it.

EC-612
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF367U
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
3. Check that air flows freely.

FE

AT

AX

SEF368U
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
BR
NG © Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.

6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

ST
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. RS
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according
to the valve opening.
BT

HA

SC

EL
PEF882U

OK or NG
IDX
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

EC-613
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

SEF334X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

SEF335X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

8 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair it.

EC-614
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10. FE
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

AT
10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to “DTC Confirmation Procedure” for DTC P0450, EC-420.
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
SU
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

11 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

BR
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12. RS
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

BT
12 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.
HA

SC

EL

IDX

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EC-615
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

13 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © GO TO 14.

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III

1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 13 again.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 15.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 16.
II)
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EC-616
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

15 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. GI
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
5. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener. MA
6. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.
EM

LC

FE
SEF793W
7. Turn ignition switch “ON”. AT
8. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions.
Measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle. AX

SU

MTBL0355
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
ST
NG © GO TO 17.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-617
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

16 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
5. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump and the throttle opener.
6. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of
the throttle opener.

SEF793W
7. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
8. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
Resistance measurement must be made with throttle position switch installed in vehicle.

SEF347X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 18.
NG © GO TO 17.

17 ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

Check the following items. Refer to “Basic Inspection”, EC-111.

MTBL0382
Is it possible to adjust closed throttle position switch?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 18.
No © Replace throttle position switch.

EC-618
 DTC P1447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM PURGE EXIT
FLOW MONITORING
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

18 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING”, EC-37.
OK or NG
GI
OK © GO TO 19.
NG © Replace it. MA

19 CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE EM

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
© GO TO 20. LC

20 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-619
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0338

NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform trouble diagno-
sis for DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is ener-
gized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The abil-
ity to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other
SEF032W evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.

SEF267X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0339
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0341

Malfunction is detected when EVAP canister vent control valve
remains opened under specified driving conditions.

Possible Cause NHEC0591

I EVAP canister vent control valve
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I Vacuum cut valve

EC-620
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
DTC Confirmation Procedure

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0342

NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440 or P1440, perform
trouble diagnosis for DTC P1448 first. GI
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test. MA

EM

WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0342S01 LC

TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
between 1/4 to 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on flat level
surface.
I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F). FE
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. AT
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
SEF565X with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that the following conditions are met. AX
COOLAN TEMP/S 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)

INT/A TEMP SE 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) SU

5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440/P1440” of “EVAPORATIVE

SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT- BR
II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range ST
displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
SEF566X
EC-111.
RS
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, go to the following step.
NOTE: BT
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
7) Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds, then turn “ON”. HA
8) Disconnect hose from water separator.
9) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode with SC
CONSULT-II.
10) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
SEF567X
EL
11) Make sure the following.
Condition Air passage continuity IDX
VENT CONTROL/V between A and B

ON No

OFF Yes

If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-624.

If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-393.
SEF723X

EC-621
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Overall Function Check

Overall Function Check NHEC0343

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0343S01
1) Disconnect hose from water separator.
2) Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connec-
tor.
3) Verify the following.
AEC783A
Condition Air passage continuity

12V direct current supply between ter-

No
minals 1 and 2

No supply Yes

If the result is NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-624.

If the result is OK, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0440, EC-393.

EC-622
DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0344

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC742C

EL

IDX

SEF668X

EC-623
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0345

1 CHECK RUBBER TUBE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.

SEF267X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Clean rubber tube using an air blower.

2 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EC-624
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. GI
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

MA

EM

LC

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II FE
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
RS

4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III BT

1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform Test No. 3 again.
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
SC
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

EL

IDX

EC-625
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve.
3. Check vacuum cut valve as follows:

SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve.

6 CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.

SEF596U

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © GO TO 9.

7 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
The weight should be less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © GO TO 8.

EC-626
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I EVAP canister for damage
I EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection GI
© Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

MA
9 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE
Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
LC
NG © Repair it.

10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water. BR
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-627
 DTC P1448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT CONTROL EXIT
VALVE (OPEN)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped.

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

12 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-628
 EXIT
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0632

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal
to the ECM. GI
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other side
is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes
depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. MA

EM
SEF614X

On Board Diagnostic Logic NHEC0633

LC
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel
level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the latter to detect open circuit malfunc-
tion. Malfunction is detected when a high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM. FE

AT

Possible Cause AX
NHEC0634
I Fuel level sensor circuit
(The fuel level sensor circuit is open or shorted.) SU

BR

ST

RS
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0635
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, BT
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
HA

SC

EL
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0635S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
IDX
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-631.
WITH GST NHEC0635S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

SEF563X

EC-629
 EXIT
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0640

MEC878C

EC-630
 EXIT
DTC P1464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT (GROUND SIGNAL)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NHEC0641

1 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
GI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. EM
NG © GO TO 2.
LC
2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Check the following.
I Harness connectors F44, M46
I Harness connectors M110, B43
I Harness for open and short between ECM and body ground FE
© Replace open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

AT
3 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to EL-157, “Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check”.
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
SU
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

4 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

BR
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
OK or NG
ST
© INSPECTION END
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-631
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Description

Description =NHEC0346
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0346S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF278X ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM NHEC0346S02

SEF323U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0347
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0349

Malfunction is detected when an improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through vacuum cut valve bypass valve.

EC-632
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Possible Cause

Possible Cause NHEC0592

I Harness or connectors
(The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve GI

MA

EM

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0350

LC
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- FE
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle speed.
AT

WITH CONSULT-II AX
NHEC0350S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SU
3) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-635. BR
WITH GST NHEC0350S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. ST
PEF357V
RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-633
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0351

MEC821C

SEF634X

EC-634
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0352

1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
GI
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
MA
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE CIRCUIT

EM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”. LC
2. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.

FE

AT

AX
PEF909U
4. Make sure that clicking sound is heard from the vacuum cut valve bypass valve. SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. BR
NG © GO TO 3.

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-635
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALUE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.

SEF278X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF356X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M5, B1
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

5 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 39 and vacuum cut valve bypass valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

EC-636
 EXIT
DTC P1490 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE (CIRCUIT)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49 GI
I Harness for open or short between vacuum cut valve bypass valve and ECM
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
MA
7 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
With CONSULT-II
EM
1. Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
LC
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

FE

AT

AX
SEF357X

Without CONSULT-II SU
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF358X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
HA
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
SC
8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157. EL
© INSPECTION END
IDX

EC-637
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Description

Description NHEC0353
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0353S01
The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF278X ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM NHEC0353S02

SEF323U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0354
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0356

Malfunction is detected when vacuum cut valve bypass valve does
not operate properly.

EC-638
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Possible Cause

Possible Cause NHEC0593

I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
I Vacuum cut valve
I Bypass hoses for clogging GI
I EVAP control system pressure sensor and circuit
I EVAP canister vent control valve
I Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve clogged
MA
I Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canister clogged
I EVAP canister EM
I EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0357
LC
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test. FE
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5 to 30°C (41 to 86°F). AT
PEF618W WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0357S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. AX
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4) Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. SU
5) Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM”
in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Touch “START”.
BR
7) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions ST
continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It
PEF619W
will take at least 30 seconds.)
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,000 - 3,000 rpm
RS
Selector lever Suitable position
BT
Vehicle speed 35 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH)

B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 8.1 msec

HA
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 3.
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG SC
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “Diagnostic
Procedure”, EC-642.
PEF912U
EL

IDX

EC-639
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Overall Function Check

Overall Function Check NHEC0358

Use this procedure to check the overall function of vacuum cut
valve bypass valve. During this check, the 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0358S01
1) Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve
as an assembly.
2) Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from
port B.
3) Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from
port A.
4) Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow
out of port A.
5) Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
6) Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
7) Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.
8) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-642.

SEF530Q

EC-640
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0359

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC821C

EL

IDX

SEF634X

EC-641
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0360

1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly.
3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
7. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and touch “ON”.
8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B.
9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.

PEF913U

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5.

EC-642
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE OPERATION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. GI
3. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
4. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
5. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A. MA
6. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass valve harness connector.
7. Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
8. Blow air in port A and check that air flows freely out of port B. EM
9. Blow air in port B and check that air flows freely out of port A.

LC

FE

AT

AX
SEF914U

OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 7.
BR
4 CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
ST
Check EVAP purge line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
RS
NG © Repair it.
BT
5 CHECK EVAP PURGE PORT
Check EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging. HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. SC
NG © Clean EVAP purge port.
EL

IDX

EC-643
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.

AEC630A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP canister.

7 CHECK BYPASS HOSE

Check bypass hoses for clogging.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair or replace hoses.

EC-644
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF357X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
FE

AT

AX

SU
SEF358X
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve bypass valve.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-645
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK VACUUM CUT VALVE

Check vacuum cut valve as follows:

SEF379Q
a. Plug port C and D with fingers.
b. Apply vacuum to port A and check that there is no suction from port B.
c. Apply vacuum to port B and check that there is suction from port A.
d. Blow air in port B and check that there is a resistance to flow out of port A.
e. Open port C and D.
f. Blow air in port A check that air flows freely out of port C.
g. Blow air in port B check that air flows freely out of port D.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace vacuum cut valve.

10 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HOSE

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check disconnection or improper connection of hose connected to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © Repair or replace.

11 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

SEF268X
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

EC-646
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor if equipped. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF799W
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control system pressure sensor as shown in figure. FE
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure. AT
5. Check input voltage between ECM terminal 84 and ground.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF342X
CAUTION:
I Discard and EVAP control system pressure sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m RS
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
BT
NG © Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
HA
13 CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. SC
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
IDX

EC-647
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

14 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-I

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

SEF337X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 15.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

15 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect harness disconnected connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

SEF338X

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.

SEF339X
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © GO TO 16.

EC-648
 EXIT
DTC P1491 VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

16 CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE-III

1. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
2. Perform the Test No. 15 again.
OK or NG
GI
OK © GO TO 17.
NG © Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. MA

17 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EM

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-649
 EXIT
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0361

The malfunction information related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through the line (circuit)
from TCM (Transmission control module) to ECM. Therefore, be sure to erase the malfunction information such
as DTC not only in TCM (Transmission control module) but also ECM after the A/T related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic NHEC0363

Malfunction is detected when an incorrect signal from TCM (Trans-
mission control module) is sent to ECM.

Possible Cause NHEC0594

I Harness or connectors
[The communication line circuit between ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) is open or shorted.]
I Dead (Weak) battery
I TCM (Transmission control module)

DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0364

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0364S01

PEF357V
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-652.
WITH GST NHEC0364S02
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

EC-650
 EXIT
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0365

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC796C

EL

IDX

EC-651
 EXIT
DTC P1605 A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0366

1 CHECK A/T DIAGNOSIS COMMUNICATION LINE INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission Control Module) harness connector.

SEF270X

SEF271X
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 60 and TCM terminal 15. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

2 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-652
 EXIT
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0367

When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral
position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the GI
“ON” signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly
also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever MA
position.

EM
AEC877A

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor LC

Mode NHEC0368
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON

P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON FE
Except above OFF

AT

On Board Diagnosis Logic AX

NHEC0370
Malfunction is detected when the signal of the park/neutral position
(PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and SU
driving.

BR

ST

RS
Possible Cause NHEC0595
I Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or BT
shorted.]
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
HA

SC

EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure NHEC0371
CAUTION: IDX
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds
before conducting the next test.

EC-653
 EXIT
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II NHEC0371S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

“N” and “P” position ON

Except the above position OFF

PEF963N If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-656.

If OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
CKPS·RPM (POS) 1,800 - 2,600 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL 2 - 10 msec

SEF136X VHCL SPEED SE 70 - 100 km/h (43 - 75 MPH)

Selector lever Suitable position

6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,

EC-656.

Overall Function Check NHEC0372

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST NHEC0372S01
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 44 and body ground
under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
SEF359X
“P” and “N” position Approx. 0

Except the above position Battery voltage

3) If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-656.

EC-654
 EXIT
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0373

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC822C

EL

IDX

SEF973X

EC-655
 EXIT
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0374

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.

SEF279X
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F10, F151
I Harness for open or short between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and engine ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44 and PNP switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F10, F151
I Harness for open or short between ECM and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

Refer to AT-106, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.

EC-656
 EXIT
DTC P1706 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-657
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description

Description NHEC0596
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NHEC0596S01

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Throttle position sensor Throttle position

Closed throttle position Throttle valve idle position

VIAS con-
Ignition switch Start signal VIAS control solenoid valve
trol
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal)

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature

SEF599X

When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power

valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collec-
tor’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold
vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the
power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.

EC-658
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Description (Cont’d)
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEC0596S02
Power Valve NHEC0596S0201
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control GI
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS con- MA
trol solenoid valve.

EM
SEF600X

VIAS Control Solenoid Valve NHEC0596S0202 LC

The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator. FE

AT
SEF288X

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-659
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0597

MEC768C

SEF636X

EC-660
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0598

1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
GI
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator moves.
MA

EM

LC

SEF601X
FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator moves.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEF602X

OK or NG
RS
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-661
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.

SEF288X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF603X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I 15A fuse
I Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
© Repair harness or connectors.

4 CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-662
 EXIT
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 RETEST OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform Test No. 1 again.
OK or NG
GI
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 6. MA

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EM

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
OK or NG LC
OK © Replace VIAS control solenoid valve as intake manifold collector assembly.
NG © Repair or replace harness or connectors.

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-663
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0383

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.

SEF812J

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0384
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Engine: After warming up Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec

INJ PULSE-B2 I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
INJ PULSE-B1 I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec

Idle 2.0 - 3.2 msec

B/FUEL SCHDL ditto
2,000 rpm 1.4 - 2.6 msec

EC-664
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0386

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC823C

EL

IDX

SEF637X

EC-665
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0387

1 INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.

PEF389V
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.

MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-666
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (Left bank) and harness connectors F43, F191 (Right bank).
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF276X

FE

AT

AX
SEF281X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SU
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground, harness connector F43 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SEF897X

OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4. SC

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART EL

Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Harness connectors F43, F191 IDX
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M19
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F43 and fuse
© Repair harness or connectors.

EC-667
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 103, 104, 107, harness connector F191 termi-
nals 6, 2, 1 and ECM terminals 101, 105, 102. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors F43, F191
I Harness for open or short between harness connector F191 and ECM
I Harness for open or short between ECM and injector
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7 CHECK SUB-HARNESS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT (RIGHT BANK)

1. Remove intake manifold collector.
2. Disconnect injector harness connectors (Right bank).
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

MTBL0359
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.

SEF964X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace injector.

EC-668
 EXIT
INJECTOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END
GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-669
 EXIT
START SIGNAL
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0388
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF

EC-670
 EXIT
START SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram =NHEC0390

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC762C

EL

IDX

SEF638X

EC-671
 EXIT
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0391

1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.

SEF604X

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.

3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the following conditions.

SEF362X

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn it to “START”.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Refer to SC-6, “STARTING SYSTEM”.

EC-672
 EXIT
START SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect 10A fuse.
3. Check if 10A fuse is OK. GI
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. MA
NG © Replace 10A fuse.

EM
6 CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
LC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and fuse block, ignition switch and fuse block. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. AT

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

AX
Check the following.
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Fuse block (J/B) connectors M17, E83 SU
I Harness for open or short between ignition switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BR

8 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ST

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-673
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
System Description

System Description NHEC0392

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Fuel pump
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal) Fuel pump relay
control
Ignition switch Start signal

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal from the crankshaft position sensor (REF), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition switch
is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving
safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn
controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.

Engine running and cranking Operates.

When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.

Except as shown above Stops.

Component Description NHEC0393

The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).

SEF605X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0394
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

I Ignition switch is turned to ON. (Operates for 1 second.)

ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I Engine running and cranking

Except as shown above OFF

EC-674
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0396

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC876C

EL

IDX

SEF639X

EC-675
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0397

1 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.

SEF606X
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.

SEF284X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEF898X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-676
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Fuse block (J/B) connector B5
I 10A fuse GI
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
© Repair harness or connectors. MA

4 CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EM
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
LC

FE

AT

SEF263X
3. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector.
AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF283X
RS
4. Check harness continuity between fuel pump terminal 2 and body ground, fuel pump terminal 1 and fuel pump relay
terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
BT
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. SC

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

EL
Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump
I Harness for open or short between fuel pump and dropping resistor IDX
I Harness for open or short between dropping resistor and body ground
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-677
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 28 and fuel pump relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B3, M6
I Harness connectors M81, F49
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector and ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check operating sound.

SEF724X

Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.

SEF608X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace fuel pump relay.

EC-678
 EXIT
FUEL PUMP
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

9 CHECK FUEL PUMP

1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 3.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF609X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace fuel pump. FE

10 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT AT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-679
 EXIT
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
System Description

System Description NHEC0599

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed (POS signal)

Engine
Electronic controlled engine
Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Engine speed (REF signal) mount con-
mount
trol
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed

The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to

the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The control system has
2-step control [soft/hard].
Vehicle condition Engine mount control

Idle (with vehicle stopped) Soft

Driving Hard

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0600
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Idle “IDLE”
ENGINE MOUNT I Engine: Running
2,000 rpm “TRVL”

EC-680
 EXIT
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0602

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
MEC824C

HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF640X

EC-681
 EXIT
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0603

1 CHECK THE OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Perform “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II and check that the body vibration changes
according to switching the condition (With vehicle stopped).

PEF784P

Without CONSULT
1. After warming up engine, run it at idle speed.
2. Shift selector lever to “D” range while depressing the brake pedal and pulling the parking brake control lever.
3. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector when engine speed is more than 1,000
rpm.
View with intake air duct
Front electronic controlled
engine mount harness connector
Rear electronic controlled
engine mount harness connector

Radiator cap
Battery

SEF285X
4. When returning engine speed to idle speed, check that the body vibration increases, compared with the condition of the
above step 2 (With vehicle stopped).
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.

EC-682
 EXIT
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector.
3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF899X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © GO TO 3.

AT
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18 AX
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
SU
© Repair harness or connectors.

4 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND BR
SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ST
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 1, ECM terminal
50 and electronic controlled engine mount terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
BT
NG © Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
HA
5 CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount. SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. EL
NG © Replace front or rear engine mount assembly.

IDX
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-683
 EXIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Component Description

Component Description NHEC0398

The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.

SEF286X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode NHEC0399
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Steering wheel in neutral position

I Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
the engine
The steering wheel is fully turned. ON

EC-684
 EXIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0401

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC765C

EL

IDX

SEF641X

EC-685
 EXIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0402

1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.

SEF177X

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.

3 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 47 and ground under the following conditions.

SEF363X

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 4.

EC-686
 EXIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEF286X
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. AT
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

AX
5 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 47 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring SU
Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. ST
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
6 CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine. BT
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

HA

SC

EL

SEF364X
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace power steering oil pressure switch.

EC-687
 EXIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-688
 EXIT
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Description

Description NHEC0636
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The GI
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem.
MA

EM
SEF287X

LC

FE

AT
SEF099XA

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

EC-689
 EXIT
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0637

MEC829C

SEF643X

EC-690
 EXIT
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0638

1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
GI
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 81 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA

EM

LC

SEF617X

OK or NG FE
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.
AT
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
AX
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. SU

BR

ST

RS

SEF287X
BT
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
HA

SC

EL

IDX
SEF618X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EC-691
 EXIT
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E15, F18
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair harness or connectors.

4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
I Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 81 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors E8, F17
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to HA-80, “Refrigerant pressure sensor”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-692
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0604

FOR USA NHEC0604S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
MEC907C
EL

IDX

SEF642XB

EC-693
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
FOR CANADA NHEC0604S02

MEC908C

SEF642XB

EC-694
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NHEC0605

1 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions.
GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF610X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. FE
NG © GO TO 3.
AT
2 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 52 and ground under the following conditions. AX

SU

BR

ST

SEF611X
RS
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
BT
NG © GO TO 7.

HA
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch. SC
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
EL
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Refer to EL-189, “Rear Window Defogger”.
IDX

EC-695
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminals 5 and 7.

SEF612X
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
I Harness connectors B1, M5
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Diode M35
I Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defigger relay
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

7 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 1st position with high beam.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Refer to EL-34, “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” or “EL-65, “HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) —
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM”.

EC-696
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect headlamp RH relay (Models with xenon headlamp), headlamp LH relay (Models without xenon headlamp). GI
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and headlamp RH relay terminal 7 or headlamp LH relay terminal
5 under the following conditions.
MA

EM

LC

SEF900X
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 11.
AT
NG © GO TO 10.

AX
9 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. SU
3. Disconnect daytime light control unit harness connector (Models for Canada).
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and daytime light control unit terminal 7 under the following condi-
tions. BR

ST

RS

BT

SEF901X HA
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 11.
NG © GO TO 10.
EL
10 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. IDX
I Harness connectors E81, M15
I Harness connectors M46, F44
I Diode E79
I Harness for open and short between ECM and headlamp RH relay, headlamp LH relay or daytime light control unit
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-697
 EXIT
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

11 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-157.
© INSPECTION END

EC-698
 EXIT
MIL & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
Wiring Diagram

Wiring Diagram NHEC0407

GI

MA

EM

LC

FE

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

MEC827C

EC-699
 EXIT
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure Regulator

Fuel Pressure Regulator NHEC0408

Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Vacuum hose is connected. Approximately 235 (2.4, 34)

Vacuum hose is disconnected. Approximately 294 (3.0, 43)

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing NHEC0409

Target idle speed*1 No-load*3 (in “P” or N” position) 700±50 rpm

Air conditioner: ON In “P” or N” position 825 rpm or more

Ignition timing*2 In “P” or N” position 15°±2° BTDC

Throttle position sensor idle position 0.15 - 0.85V

*1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected

*2: Throttle position sensor harness connector disconnected
*3: Under the following conditions:
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
I Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
I Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Mass Air Flow Sensor NHEC0411

Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8*V

2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*

Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*

*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor NHEC0412

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00

90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

EGR Temperature Sensor NHEC0413

EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage V Resistance MΩ

0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11

50 (122) 2.53 0.09 - 0.12

100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024

Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater NHEC0414

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω

Fuel Pump NHEC0415

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 0.2 - 5.0Ω

IACV-AAC Valve NHEC0416

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 22Ω

EC-700
 EXIT
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Injector

Injector NHEC0417

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 14 - 15Ω

Resistor GI
NHEC0418

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 2.2 kΩ

MA
Throttle Position Sensor NHEC0419

Voltage EM
(at normal operating temperature,
Throttle valve conditions
engine off, ignition switch ON,
throttle opener disengaged) LC
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85V

Partially open Between (a) and (b)

Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7V

Calculated Load Value FE

NHEC0420

Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

AT
At idle 14.0 - 33.0

At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0

AX
Intake Air Temperature Sensor NHEC0421

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ SU

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 BR

Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater NHEC0422 ST

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω

Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) RS

NHEC0423

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 470 - 570Ω

BT
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor NHEC0424

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

HA
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7

50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90

SC

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) NHEC0639 EL

HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760Ω
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]
MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550Ω IDX

EC-701
 EXIT

NOTES